Mercedes - CL S300d - Owners Manual - 2014 - 2014

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only Thank you for buying Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. RModel ROrder RCountry variant RAvailability The illustrations in this manual show a lefthand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of components and controls differs accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROwner's Manual Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. RService i You can get to know the important fea- tures of your vehicle in the interactive Owner's Manual on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ betriebsanleitung 2185844700Z102 É2185844700Z102*ËÍ Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 29 Introduction ......................................... 23 Safety ................................................... 41 Opening and closing ........................... 81 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 103 Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 121 Climate control ................................. 137 Driving and parking .......................... 157 On-board computer and displays .... 239 Stowing and features ....................... 299 Maintenance and care ...................... 327 Breakdown assistance ..................... 343 Wheels and tyres .............................. 363 Technical data ................................... 395 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4ETS see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 206 4MATIC off-road system ................... 206 12 V socket see Sockets A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 262 Function/notes ................................ 70 Important safety notes .................... 70 Warning lamp ................................. 289 Accident Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 55 Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode .................................... 148 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 143 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 250 Display message ............................ 276 Function/notes ............................. 227 Towing a trailer .............................. 229 Active Driving Assistance package .. 227 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 251 Display message ............................ 275 Function/notes ............................. 229 Towing a trailer .............................. 232 Active light function ......................... 127 Active multicontour seat Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 110 Active Parking Assist Detecting parking spaces .............. 211 Display message ............................ 277 Function/notes ............................. 210 Important safety notes .................. 210 Parking .......................................... 212 Towing a trailer .............................. 213 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 76 Adaptive brake lights .......................... 72 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 204 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 270 Function/notes ............................. 128 Switching on/off ........................... 129 AdBlue® Display message ............................ 273 Filling capacity ............................... 404 Important safety notes .................. 403 Service indicator ............................ 333 AdBlue® service indicator ................ 333 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 404 Air filter (white display message) .... 273 AIR FLOW ........................................... 144 Air pressure see Tyre pressure Air vents Glove compartment ....................... 155 Important safety notes .................. 154 Rear ............................................... 155 Setting ........................................... 154 Setting the centre air vents ........... 155 Setting the side air vents ............... 155 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Airbag Introduction ..................................... 48 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ........................................... 43 Airbags Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 49 Important safety guidelines ............. 48 Kneebag ........................................... 49 Pelvis airbag .................................... 50 Sidebag ............................................ 50 Triggering ......................................... 51 Windowbag ...................................... 50 AIRMATIC Display message ............................ 274 Function/notes ............................. 202 Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 78 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 78 Index Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 78 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Ambient lighting Setting the brightness (on-board computer) ...................................... 253 Setting the colour (on-board computer) ............................................. 254 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension ............................................... 204 Anti-glare film .................................... 326 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Aquaplaning ....................................... 185 Ashtray ............................................... 315 Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 249 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 249 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 333 Hiding a service message .............. 333 Notes ............................................. 332 Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 333 Service message ............................ 332 Special service requirements ......... 333 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 78 Function ........................................... 78 Interior motion sensor ..................... 79 Switching off the alarm .................... 78 Tow-away protection ........................ 79 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 250 Display message ............................ 274 Function/notes ............................. 218 Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ 269 see Lights Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... 164 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... Automatic headlamp mode .............. Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. Automatic drive program ............... Changing gear ............................... DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... Display message ............................ Drive program display .................... Driving tips .................................... Emergency running mode .............. Engaging drive position .................. Engaging neutral ............................ Engaging park position (AMG vehicles) ............................................... Engaging reverse gear ................... Engaging the park position ............ Kickdown ....................................... Manual drive program .................... Manual drive program (AMG vehicles) ............................................... Manual drive program (vehicles with Sports package AMG) ............ Overview ........................................ Problem (fault) ............................... Program selector button ................ Pulling away ................................... Selector lever ................................ Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... Trailer towing ................................. Transmission position display ........ Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency running mode ......................... Auxiliary heating Activating/deactivating ................. Activating/deactivating (on the centre console) .............................. Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. Problem (display message) ............ Remote control .............................. Setting ........................................... Setting the departure time ............. 163 123 171 173 171 168 282 169 171 177 170 170 168 169 169 171 174 175 175 167 177 171 162 168 161 173 171 168 169 170 177 150 151 284 150 154 151 256 152 5 6 Index Auxiliary ventilation Activating/deactivating ................. Activating/deactivating (on the centre console) .............................. Problem (display message) ............ Remote control .............................. Axle load, permissible (trailer towing) ...................................................... 150 151 154 151 410 B Ball coupling Folding in ....................................... 236 Folding out ..................................... 234 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 70 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) .................................................... 71 Battery (key) Checking .......................................... 85 Important safety notes .................... 85 Replacing ......................................... 86 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 353 Display message ............................ 271 Important safety notes .................. 351 Jump starting ................................. 355 Belt see Seat belts Belt tensioner Activation ......................................... 51 Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 250 Display message ............................ 276 Notes/function .............................. 223 Trailer towing ................................. 225 see Active Blind Spot Assist BlueTEC (AdBlue®) ............................ 403 Bluetooth® SAP V3 telephone module see Separate operating instructions Bonnet Closing ........................................... 329 Display message ............................ 283 Important safety notes .................. 328 Opening ......................................... 328 Boot Emergency release .......................... 95 Important safety notes .................... 91 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 94 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 92 Opening/closing (manually from outside) ............................................ 92 Boot lid Display message ............................ 283 Opening dimensions ...................... 407 Boot load (maximum) ........................ 407 Bottle holders .................................... 314 Box (boot) ........................................... 308 Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 264 Notes ............................................. 405 Brake lamps Adaptive ........................................... 72 Display message ............................ 268 Brakes ABS .................................................. 70 BAS .................................................. 70 BAS PLUS ........................................ 71 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 405 Display message ............................ 262 Driving tips .................................... 183 High-performance brake system .... 184 HOLD function ............................... 200 Important safety notes .................. 183 Parking brake ................................ 181 Warning lamp ................................. 288 Breakdown see Flat tyre see Towing away Bulbs see Replacing bulbs C Calling up a fault see Display messages Car see Vehicle Car key see Key Car wash (care) ................................. 334 Index Care Automatic car wash ....................... 334 Carpets .......................................... 341 Display ........................................... 339 Exhaust pipe .................................. 338 Exterior lighting ............................. 337 Gear or selector lever .................... 340 High-pressure cleaner .................... 335 Interior ........................................... 339 Matt paintwork .............................. 336 Night View Assist Plus ................... 339 Notes ............................................. 334 Paint .............................................. 336 Plastic trim .................................... 339 Reversing camera .......................... 338 Roof lining ...................................... 341 Seat belt ........................................ 340 Seat cover ..................................... 340 Sensors ......................................... 337 Steering wheel ............................... 340 Trim pieces .................................... 340 Washing by hand ........................... 335 Wheels ........................................... 336 Windows ........................................ 337 Wiper blades .................................. 337 Wooden load compartment floor ... 341 Wooden trim .................................. 340 CD player/CD changer(on-board computer) .......................................... 246 Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 255 Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 83 Centre console Lower section .................................. 37 Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 38 Upper section .................................. 36 Changing bulbs Reversing lamps ............................ 132 Child seat Automatic recognition ..................... 59 Forward-facing restraint system ...... 62 ISOFIX .............................................. 57 On the front-passenger seat ............ 61 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 63 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 62 Recommendations ........................... 66 Suitable positions ............................ 63 Top Tether ....................................... 57 Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 68 Rear doors ....................................... 69 Children Restraint systems ............................ 56 Cigarette lighter ................................ 317 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 337 Trailer tow hitch ............................. 338 Climate control Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 150 Controlling automatically ............... 144 Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) ................. 148 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 143 Demisting the windows .................. 147 Demisting the windscreen ............. 146 Important safety notes .................. 138 Indicator lamp ................................ 144 Information about using THERMATIC automatic climate control ........................................... 139 Information on using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control .................................. 142 Overview of systems ...................... 138 Problem with the rear window heating .......................................... 148 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 144 Rear control panel ......................... 141 Setting the air distribution ............. 145 Setting the air vents ...................... 154 Setting the airflow ......................... 146 Setting the climate mode (AIR FLOW) ............................................ 144 Setting the temperature ................ 145 Setting the temperature, THERMATIC ................................... 145 Setting the temperature, THERMOTRONIC ............................ 145 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 148 Switching on/off ........................... 142 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 149 Switching the rear window heating on/off ...................................... 147 7 8 Index Switching the ZONE function on/ off .................................................. 146 THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone) ............................. 139 THERMOTRONIC (3-zone) automatic climate control ..................... 141 Coat hooks ......................................... 306 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 30 see Instrument cluster Collapsible emergency spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel COMAND display Cleaning ......................................... 339 COMAND Online see separate operating instructions Combination switch .......................... 125 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 243 Convenience box ............................... 308 Convenience closing feature .............. 97 Convenience opening feature ............ 97 Convenience opening/closing (airrecirculation mode) ........................... 148 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 331 Display message ............................ 270 Important safety notes .................. 405 Temperature (on-board computer) ............................................. 258 Temperature gauge ........................ 240 Warning lamp ................................. 295 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ............................................. 28 Cornering light function Display message ............................ 267 Function/notes ............................. 127 Crash-responsive emergency lighting ....................................................... 131 Cruise control Activation conditions ..................... 187 Cruise control lever ....................... 186 Deactivating ................................... 188 Display message ............................ 279 Driving system ............................... 186 Important safety notes .................. LIM indicator lamp ......................... Selecting ........................................ Setting a speed .............................. Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. Cup holder Centre console .............................. Important safety notes .................. Rear centre console ....................... Rear compartment ......................... 186 186 187 188 187 313 313 313 313 D Dashboard see Instrument cluster Data see Technical data Daytime driving lights Display message ............................ 269 Function/notes ............................. 123 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 253 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declarations of conformity ................. 25 Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (on-board computer) ............................................. 254 Interior lighting .............................. 254 Diagnostics connection ...................... 25 Diesel .................................................. 402 Digital speedometer ......................... 244 Dipped-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 267 Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ........................................ 122 Setting for driving on the right/ left ................................................. 253 Switching on/off ........................... 123 DIRECT SELECT lever see Automatic transmission Display message Driving systems ............................. 274 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 285 Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 332 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 261 Index Engine ............................................ 270 General information ....................... 261 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 261 Key ................................................ 285 Lights ............................................. 267 Safety systems .............................. 262 Tyres .............................................. 280 Vehicle ........................................... 282 Distance recorder see Trip meter Distance warning signal (warning lamp) .................................................. 297 DISTRONIC PLUS Activating ....................................... 193 Activation conditions ..................... 193 Deactivating ................................... 198 Display message ............................ 277 Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ 197 Function/notes ............................. 191 Important safety notes .................. 192 Selecting ........................................ 193 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 197 Warning lamp ................................. 297 Door Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 255 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 90 Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 83 Control panel ................................... 40 Display message ............................ 283 Emergency locking ........................... 90 Emergency unlocking ....................... 90 Important safety notes .................... 88 Opening (from the inside) ................ 89 Drive program Automatic ...................................... 173 Display ........................................... 168 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 169 Manual ........................................... 174 Manual (AMG vehicles) .................. 175 Manual (vehicles with Sports package AMG) ............................... 175 Drive program selector ..................... 172 Driver's door see Door Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 333 Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 122 Driving on flooded roads .................. 185 Driving safety system BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) ............................................... 71 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 76 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 70 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 76 Adaptive brake lights ....................... 72 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 70 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 72 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ........................................... 72 Important safety guidelines ............. 70 Overview .......................................... 69 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................ 76 Driving systems Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 227 Active Driving Assistance package ................................................. 227 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 229 Active Parking Assist ..................... 210 AIRMATIC ...................................... 202 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension .......................................... 204 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 218 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 223 Cruise control ................................ 186 Display message ............................ 274 Distronic Plus ................................ 191 HOLD function ............................... 200 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 225 Lane package ................................ 223 Night View Assist Plus ................... 220 PARKTRONIC ................................. 207 RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 201 Reversing camera .......................... 214 Speed Limit Assist ......................... 219 SPEEDTRONIC ............................... 189 Driving tips AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 184 Aquaplaning ................................... 185 Automatic transmission ................. 171 9 10 Index Brakes ........................................... Downhill gradient ........................... Driving abroad ............................... Driving in winter ............................. Driving on flooded roads ................ Driving on wet roads ...................... General .......................................... Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... New brake pads/linings ................ Running-in tips ............................... Snow chains .................................. Symmetrical dipped beam ............. Towing a trailer .............................. Wet road surface ........................... DVD audio Operating (on-board computer) ..... DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... 183 183 122 185 185 185 182 185 184 184 158 367 122 233 184 246 247 E EASY-ENTRY feature Activating/deactivating ................. 257 Function/notes ............................. 115 EASY-EXIT feature Crash-responsive ........................... 116 Function/notes ............................. 115 Switching on/off ........................... 257 EASY-PACK convenience box ........... 308 EASY-PACK load-securing kit Components and storage .............. 310 Inserting the brackets into the loading rail ..................................... 310 EASY-PACK luggage compartment management system ........................ 310 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 264 Function/notes ................................ 76 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 182 On-board computer ....................... 244 ECO start/stop function Automatic engine switch-off .......... 163 Deactivating/activating ................. 164 General information ....................... 163 Important safety notes .................. 163 Introduction ................................... 163 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ................ 25 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 55 Emergency key Unlocking the driver's door .............. 90 Emergency key element Function/notes ................................ 84 Inserting .......................................... 85 Locking vehicle ................................ 90 Removing ......................................... 85 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 90 Fuel filler flap ................................. 179 Emergency spare wheel General notes ................................ 391 Important safety notes .................. 390 Inflating the collapsible spare wheel ............................................. 392 Removing ....................................... 391 Storage location ............................ 391 Stowing .......................................... 392 Technical data ............................... 394 Emergency unlocking Tailgate ............................................ 95 Vehicle ............................................. 90 Engine Display message ............................ 270 ECO start/stop function ................ 163 Engine number ............................... 399 Jump-starting ................................. 355 Running irregularly ......................... 166 Starting problems .......................... 166 Starting the engine with the key .... 161 Starting with KEYLESS GO ............. 162 Stopping ........................................ 181 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 360 Warning lamp (engine diagnostics) ............................................... 295 Engine electronics Notes ............................................. 396 Index Problem (fault) ............................... 166 Engine jump starting see Jump starting (engine) Engine oil Additives ........................................ 404 Checking the oil level ..................... 329 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 329 Display message ............................ 272 Filling capacity ............................... 404 Notes about oil grades ................... 404 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 329 Temperature (on-board computer) ............................................. 258 Topping up ..................................... 330 Viscosity ........................................ 405 Environmental protection Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 23 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 258 Characteristics ................................. 73 Deactivating/activating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 74 Deactivating/activating (except AMG vehicles) ................................ 250 Deactivating/activating (notes; except AMG vehicles) ...................... 73 Display message ............................ 262 ETS/4ETS ........................................ 72 Function/notes ................................ 72 General notes .................................. 72 Important safety guidelines ............. 73 Trailer stabilisation .......................... 75 Warning lamp ................................. 291 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 72 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 338 Exterior lighting Settings options ............................. 122 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 116 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 117 Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 257 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 117 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... Out of position (troubleshooting) ... Parking position ............................. Resetting ....................................... Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 117 117 118 117 119 F Fault message see Display messages Filler cap see Fuel filler flap Fire extinguisher ............................... 345 First-aid kit ......................................... 344 Fitting a wheel Fitting a wheel ............................... 377 Lowering the vehicle ...................... 378 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 374 Raising the vehicle ......................... 375 Removing a wheel .......................... 377 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 375 Flat tyre MOExtended tyres ......................... 347 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 347 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 348 see Emergency spare wheel Floormat ............................................. 326 Foglamps (extended range) .............. 128 Frequencies Garage door opener ....................... 323 Mobile phone ................................. 396 Two-way radio ................................ 396 Fuel Additives ........................................ 401 Consumption information .............. 402 Consumption statistics .................. 243 Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 244 Displaying the range ...................... 244 E10 ................................................ 400 Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Grade (petrol) ................................ 400 Important safety notes .................. 399 Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 401 Problem (malfunction) ................... 180 Quality (diesel) ............................... 402 11 12 Index Refuelling ....................................... 177 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 400 Fuel filler flap Emergency release ........................ 179 Opening ......................................... 178 Fuel filter (white display message) .. 273 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 244 Gauge .............................................. 32 Fuel reserve see Fuel Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 400 Problem (malfunction) ................... 180 Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool kit) ...................................................... 345 Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 360 Before changing ............................. 360 Fuse box in the boot ...................... 361 Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. 361 Fuse box in the luggage compartment .............................................. 362 Important safety notes .................. 360 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... 322 Frequencies ................................... 323 General notes ................................ 320 Important safety notes .................. 320 Opening/closing the garage door .. 322 Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 320 Gear indicator (on-board computer) .................................................. 258 Gearshift program SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 258 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... 23 Glove compartment .......................... 301 H Handbrake see Parking brake Hazard warning lamps ...................... 126 Head restraints Adjusting ....................................... 107 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 108 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 107 Adjusting (rear) .............................. 108 Fitting/removing (rear) .................. 109 Luxury ............................................ 108 see NECK-PRO head restraints see NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Headbag Display message ............................ 267 Headlamp Cleaning system (function) ............ 127 Cleaning system (notes) ................ 406 Headlamps Misting up ...................................... 129 Topping up the cleaning system .... 332 see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High-pressure cleaners .................... 335 Hill start assist .................................. 162 HOLD function Activating ....................................... 201 Deactivating ................................... 201 Display message ............................ 275 Function/notes ............................. 200 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobiliser .......................................... 78 In-car hotspot see Separate operating instructions Indicator and warning lamp Restraint system ............................ 294 Indicator and warning lamps Coolant .......................................... 295 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 297 Engine diagnostics ......................... 295 SPORT handling mode ................... 292 Indicator lamps Display message ............................ 268 see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Index Insect protection on the radiator .... 329 Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 32 Settings ......................................... 252 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 252 Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating ................. 253 Display message ............................ 269 Overview ........................................ 127 Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left .. 253 Interior lighting Automatic control system .............. 130 Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) ...................................... 254 Emergency lighting ........................ 131 Manual control ............................... 131 Overview ........................................ 130 Reading lamp ................................. 130 Setting brightness for display/ switches (on-board computer) ....... 252 Setting the ambient lighting brightness (on-board computer) .... 253 Setting the ambient lighting colour (on-board computer) ................ 254 Interior motion sensor Deactivating ..................................... 80 Function ........................................... 79 Priming ............................................ 79 Switching off .................................... 80 ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 57 J Jack Storage location ............................ 345 Using ............................................. 375 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 355 K Key Changing the battery ....................... 86 Checking the battery ....................... 85 Convenience closing feature ............ 98 Convenience opening feature .......... 97 Display message ............................ 285 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 83 Emergency key element ................... 84 Important safety notes .................... 82 Loss ................................................. 87 Modifying the programming ............. 84 Overview .......................................... 82 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 159 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 87 Starting the engine ........................ 161 Key positions Key ................................................ 159 KEYLESS GO .................................. 159 KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing ........................ 98 Display message ............................ 285 Locking ............................................ 83 Removing the Start/Stop button ... 160 Start/Stop button .......................... 159 Starting the engine ........................ 162 Unlocking ......................................... 83 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 171 Manual drive program .................... 176 Kneebag ............................................... 49 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ................. Display message ............................ Function/information .................... Lane package ..................................... Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... Lashing eyelets ................................. Licence plate lamp (display message) ................................................... Light sensor (display message) ....... Lighting see Lights Lights Activating/deactivating the Intelligent Light System ........................ Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off ....... Active light function ....................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 251 275 225 223 259 306 268 269 253 254 127 128 13 14 Index Automatic headlamp mode ............ 123 Cornering light function ................. 127 Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 123 Driving abroad ............................... 122 Foglamps (extended range) ........... 128 Hazard warning lamps ................... 126 Headlamp flasher ........................... 126 Light switch ................................... 122 Main-beam headlamps ................... 126 Motorway mode ............................. 128 Parking lamps ................................ 125 Rear foglamp ................................. 124 Setting brightness for display/ switches (on-board computer) ....... 252 Setting the ambient lighting brightness (on-board computer) .... 253 Setting the ambient lighting colour (on-board computer) ................ 254 Side lamps ..................................... 124 Switching the daytime driving lights on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 253 Switching the exterior lighting delayed switch-off on/off (onboard computer) ............................ 254 Switching the surround lighting on/off (on-board computer) .......... 254 Turn signals ................................... 125 see Interior lighting see Replacing bulbs LIM indicator lamp Cruise control ................................ 186 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 193 Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 189 Limiting the speed see SPEEDTRONIC Loading guidelines ............................ 300 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 90 Emergency locking ........................... 90 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 89 Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 255 Luggage compartment cover Fitting/removing ........................... Important safety notes .................. Notes/function .............................. Luggage compartment enlargement ................................................... Luggage compartment floor opening/closing ............................ stowage well, under ....................... Luggage cover Removing and fitting ...................... Luggage holder (EASY-PACK loadsecuring kit) ....................................... Lumbar support Adjusting ....................................... Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ Luxury head restraint ....................... 307 306 306 304 311 311 307 310 111 111 108 M M+S tyres ........................................... Main-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. Display message ............................ Switching on/off ........................... Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Massage function (PULSE) ............... Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .. Media Interface see Separate operating instructions Memory card (audio) ......................... Memory function ............................... Mercedes-Benz Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. Messages see Display messages Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in sun visor) Mobile phone Frequencies ................................... Installation ..................................... Menu (on-board computer) ............ 366 128 268 126 110 336 246 119 261 396 396 247 Index Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 319 Transmission output (maximum) .... 396 Modifying the programming (key) ..... 84 MOExtended tyres ............................. 347 Motorway mode ................................ 128 MP3 Operating ....................................... 246 see Separate operating instructions Multicontour seat Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 109 Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 242 Permanent display ......................... 252 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 241 Overview .......................................... 35 N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) ............ 245 NECK-PRO head restraints Operation ......................................... 53 Resetting after being triggered ........ 53 NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Important safety notes .................... 53 Operation ......................................... 53 Resetting after being triggered ........ 54 Night View Assist Plus Activating/deactivating ................. 221 Cleaning ......................................... 339 Function/notes ............................. 220 Problem (fault) ............................... 223 Notes on running in a new vehicle .. 158 O Occupant safety Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 55 Children in the vehicle ..................... 55 Important safety notes .................... 43 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 69 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 54 Odometer ........................................... 243 Oil see Engine oil On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 258 Assistance menu ........................... 249 Audio menu ................................... 246 Convenience submenu .................. 257 Display messages .......................... 261 Displaying a service message ........ 333 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 197 Factory setting submenu ............... 258 Heating submenu ........................... 256 Important safety notes .................. 240 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 252 Light submenu ............................... 252 Menu overview .............................. 243 Message memory .......................... 261 Navigation menu ............................ 245 Operating the TV ............................ 247 Operating video DVD ..................... 247 Operation ....................................... 241 RACETIMER ................................... 259 Service menu ................................. 251 Settings menu ............................... 251 Standard display ............................ 243 Telephone menu ............................ 247 Trip menu ...................................... 243 Vehicle submenu ........................... 255 Operating instructions Vehicle equipment ........................... 24 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 25 Important safety note ...................... 24 Operating system see On-board computer Outside temperature display ........... 240 Overhead control panel ...................... 39 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 69 P Paint code .......................................... 398 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 336 Panic alarm .......................................... 42 Parking Important safety notes .................. 180 Parking brake ................................ 181 Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 118 15 16 Index Reversing camera .......................... 214 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid Active Parking Assist ..................... 210 see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking assistance see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Display message ............................ 264 Notes/function .............................. 181 Warning lamp ................................. 288 Parking lamps Display message ............................ 269 Switching on/off ........................... 125 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 209 Driving system ............................... 207 Function/notes ............................. 207 Important safety notes .................. 207 Problem (fault) ............................... 210 Sensor range ................................. 207 Trailer towing ................................. 209 Warning display ............................. 208 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Indicator lamp .................................. 43 Problems (malfunctions) .................. 63 Petrol .................................................. 400 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 69 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 339 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Operation ......................................... 54 PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant safety system) Display message ............................ 265 PRE-SAFE® Brake Activating/deactivating ................. 250 Display message ............................ 265 Function/notes ................................ 76 Warning lamp ................................. 297 Program selector button .................. 171 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 23 Pulling away General notes ................................ 162 Pulling away (automatic transmission) .................................................... 162 Q Qualified specialist workshop ........... 26 R RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 201 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 259 Radar sensor system Activating/deactivating ................. 255 Display message ............................ 275 Radiator cover ................................... 329 Radio Selecting a station ......................... 246 see separate operating instructions Radio-based vehicle components Declaration of conformity ................ 25 Rain closing feature (sliding sunroof) .................................................... 101 Reading lamp ..................................... 130 Rear compartment Setting the air vents ...................... 155 Rear foglamp Display message ............................ 269 Switching on/off ........................... 124 Rear seat Display message ............................ 284 Rear seat (folding the backrest forwards/back) ...................................... 304 Rear Seat Entertainment System see Separate operating instructions Rear window blind ............................ 315 Rear window heating Problem (fault) ............................... 148 Switching on/off ........................... 147 Rear window wiper Replacing the wiper blade .............. 135 Switching on/off ........................... 134 Rear-compartment seat belt status indicator ........................................ 47 Rear-view mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 117 Dipping (manual) ........................... 116 Index Refuelling Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Important safety notes .................. 177 Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 401 Refuelling process ......................... 178 see Fuel Remote control Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 151 Changing the batteries (auxiliary heating) ......................................... 152 Garage door opener ....................... 320 Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 320 Replacing bulbs Important safety notes .................. 131 Overview of bulb types .................. 132 Replacing the battery (auxiliary heating remote control) .................... 152 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 272 Warning lamp ................................. 295 Residual heat (climate control) ........ 149 Restraint system Display message ............................ 266 Introduction ..................................... 42 Warning lamp ................................. 294 Warning lamp (function) ................... 43 Rev counter ........................................ 240 Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 168 Reversing camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 338 Function/notes ............................. 214 Switching on/off ........................... 214 Reversing feature Side windows ................................... 96 Sliding sunroof ............................... 100 Reversing function Boot lid/tailgate .............................. 92 Reversing lamp Changing bulbs .............................. 132 Reversing lamp (display message) .. 269 Roller sunblind Rear window .................................. 315 Roof carrier ........................................ 312 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning instructions) ...................................... 341 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 407 S Safety Child restraint systems .................... 56 Children in the vehicle ..................... 55 Safety net Attaching ....................................... 308 Important safety information ......... 307 Safety system see Driving safety systems Seat Adjusting the active multicontour seat ............................................... 110 Adjusting the multicontour seat ..... 109 Folding the backrest (rear compartment) forwards/back .............. 305 Massage function .......................... 110 Seat backrest display message ..... 284 Seat belt Centre rear-compartment seat ........ 46 Correct usage .................................. 45 Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) ...................... 257 Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 47 Adjusting the height ......................... 46 Cleaning ......................................... 340 Display message ............................ 265 Fastening ......................................... 46 Important safety guidelines ............. 44 Introduction ..................................... 44 Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 47 Releasing ......................................... 46 Warning lamp ................................. 287 Warning lamp (function) ................... 47 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ................... 106 Adjusting lumbar support .............. 111 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 111 Adjusting the head restraint .......... 107 Cleaning the cover ......................... 340 Correct driver's seat position ........ 104 17 18 Index Important safety notes .................. 105 Overview ........................................ 105 Seat heating problem .................... 112 Seat ventilation problem ................ 113 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 119 Switching seat heating on/off ....... 111 Switching the seat ventilation on/ off .................................................. 112 Selector lever Cleaning ......................................... 340 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 337 Service see ASSYST PLUS Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 251 Service products AdBlue® special additives ............. 403 Brake fluid ..................................... 405 Coolant (engine) ............................ 405 Engine oil ....................................... 404 Fuel ................................................ 399 Important safety notes .................. 399 Washer fluid ................................... 406 Setting the air distribution ............... 145 Setting the airflow ............................ 146 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 258 On-board computer ....................... 251 SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 258 Side lamps Switching on/off ........................... 124 Side windows Convenience closing ........................ 97 Convenience opening ...................... 97 Important safety notes .................... 96 Opening/closing .............................. 96 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 99 Resetting ......................................... 98 Sidebag ................................................ 50 Sliding sunroof Important safety information ........... 99 Opening/closing ............................ 100 Problem (malfunction) ................... 102 Rain closing feature ....................... 101 Resetting ....................................... 101 Snow chains ...................................... 367 Socket Luggage compartment ................... 319 Under the armrest ......................... 318 Sockets Centre console .............................. 318 General notes ................................ 317 Rear compartment ......................... 318 Spare wheel Storing ........................................... 392 Specialist workshop ............................ 26 Spectacles compartment ................. 301 Speed Limit Assist Activating/deactivating the warning function .................................... 249 Display message ............................ 275 Display message in the multifunction display .................................... 220 Important safety notes .................. 219 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speedometer Digital ............................................ 244 In the Instrument cluster ................. 32 Segments ...................................... 241 Selecting the unit of measurement .............................................. 252 see Instrument cluster SPEEDTRONIC Deactivating variable ..................... 191 Display message ............................ 278 Function/notes ............................. 189 Important safety notes .................. 189 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 189 Permanent ..................................... 191 Selecting ........................................ 190 Storing the current speed .............. 190 Variable ......................................... 189 SPORT handling mode Activating/deactivating (AMG vehicles) .......................................... 74 Warning lamp ................................. 292 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ................................ 161 Steering (display message) .............. 285 Index Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ................... 114 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 113 Button overview ............................... 35 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 241 Cleaning ......................................... 340 Gearshift paddles ........................... 173 Important safety notes .................. 113 Steering wheel heating .................. 114 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 119 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 173 Steering wheel heating Problem (malfunction) ................... 115 Switching on/off ........................... 114 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 259 Stowage areas ................................... 300 Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. 302 Centre console .............................. 302 Centre console (rear compartment) ............................................. 303 Cup holder ..................................... 313 Glove compartment ....................... 301 Important safety information ......... 300 Rear ............................................... 303 Spectacles compartment ............... 301 Under driver's seat/frontpassenger seat .............................. 302 Stowage net ....................................... 303 Stowage space Stowage net ................................... 303 Stowage well beneath the boot floor .................................................... 311 Summer tyres .................................... 366 Sun visor ............................................ 314 Surround lighting (on-board computer) .................................................. 254 Suspension tuning AIRMATIC ...................................... 204 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension .......................................... 205 SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 258 T Tail lamps Display message ............................ 268 Tailgate Display message ............................ 283 Emergency unlocking ....................... 95 Important safety notes .................... 91 Limiting the opening angle ............... 94 Opening dimensions ...................... 407 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 94 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 92 Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 92 Tank see Fuel tank Technical data Capacities ...................................... 399 Emergency spare wheel ................. 394 Information .................................... 396 Trailer loads ................................... 410 Tyres/wheels ................................. 378 Vehicle data ................................... 407 Telephone Accepting a call ............................. 248 Display message ............................ 285 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 247 Number from the phone book ........ 248 Redialling ....................................... 249 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 248 Telephone compartment ................ 302 Telescopic rod (Easy-Pack fix kit) .... 311 Temperature Coolant .......................................... 240 Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 258 Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 258 Outside temperature ...................... 240 Setting (climate control) ................ 145 TEMPOMAT Function/notes ............................. 186 Theft-deterrent system ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 78 Immobiliser ...................................... 78 Through-loading feature ................... 303 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 259 TIREFIT kit .......................................... 348 Top Tether ............................................ 57 Total distance recorder .................... 243 Tow-away protection Activating ......................................... 79 19 20 Index Deactivating ..................................... 79 Function ........................................... 79 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 360 Important safety notes .................. 357 Towing Important safety notes .................. 357 With the rear axle raised ................ 359 Towing a trailer Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 229 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 232 Active Parking Assist ..................... 213 Axle load, permissible .................... 410 Bulb failure indicator for LED lamps ............................................. 237 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 75 Towing away Fitting the towing eye .................... 358 Removing the towing eye ............... 359 With both axles on the ground ....... 359 Trailer Display message ............................ 284 Trailer coupling see Towing a trailer Trailer towing 7-pin connector ............................. 237 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 225 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 338 Coupling up a trailer ...................... 235 Decoupling a trailer ....................... 235 Driving tips .................................... 233 Folding in the ball coupling ............ 236 Folding out the ball coupling .......... 234 Important safety notes .................. 232 Lights display message .................. 267 Mounting dimensions .................... 409 Parktronic ...................................... 209 Power supply ................................. 236 Trailer loads ................................... 410 Transmission see Automatic transmission Transmission position display ......... 169 Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 169 Transporting the vehicle .................. 359 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 340 Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. Trip meter Calling up ....................................... Resetting (on-board computer) ...... Turn signals Switching on/off ........................... TV Operating (on-board computer) ..... see Separate operating instructions Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... Installation ..................................... Transmission output (maximum) .... Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Tyre pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Tyre pressure loss warning General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Restarting ...................................... Tyre pressure monitor Checking the tyre pressure electronically ........................................ Function/notes ............................. General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor ........................... Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... Tyres Changing a wheel .......................... Checking ........................................ Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ Important safety notes .................. MOExtended tyres ......................... Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... Storing ........................................... 243 243 244 125 247 396 396 396 370 280 370 350 350 367 369 369 369 371 370 370 370 373 372 298 372 373 365 374 280 364 366 373 365 374 Index Tyre size (data) .............................. 378 Tyre tread ...................................... 365 Wheel and tyre combinations ........ 380 see Flat tyre U Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 90 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 89 V Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 315 Variable SPEEDTRONIC see SPEEDTRONIC Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 26 Data acquisition ............................... 27 Display message ............................ 282 Electronics ..................................... 396 Equipment ....................................... 24 Implied warranty .............................. 27 Individual settings .......................... 251 Leaving parked up ......................... 182 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 90 Locking (key) ................................... 83 Lowering ........................................ 378 Pulling away ................................... 162 Raising ........................................... 375 Registration ..................................... 26 Securing from rolling away ............ 375 Towing away .................................. 357 Transporting .................................. 359 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 90 Unlocking (key) ................................ 83 Vehicle data ................................... 407 Vehicle data ....................................... 407 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 407 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 90 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 398 Vehicle level AIRMATIC ...................................... 202 Vehicle level (display message) ....... 274 Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle tool kit .................................. Vehicle weights ................................. Video Operating the DVD ......................... VIN ...................................................... 345 407 247 398 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 289 Brakes ........................................... 288 Distance warning signal ................. 297 ESP® ............................................. 291 ESP® OFF ...................................... 292 LIM (cruise control) ........................ 186 LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 193 LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 189 Overview .......................................... 34 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 43 Reserve fuel ................................... 295 Seat belt ........................................ 287 Tyre pressure monitor ................... 298 Warning triangle ................................ 344 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 285 Wheel and tyre combinations see Tyres Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 378 Wheel chock ...................................... 375 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 373 Changing/replacing ....................... 373 Checking ........................................ 365 Cleaning ......................................... 336 Cleaning (warning) ......................... 374 Emergency spare wheel ................. 390 Fitting a new wheel ........................ 377 Fitting a wheel ............................... 374 Important safety notes .................. 364 Removing a wheel .......................... 377 Storing ........................................... 374 Tightening torque ........................... 378 Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 378 Windowbag Operation ......................................... 50 21 22 Index Windows Cleaning ......................................... see Side windows Windscreen Demisting ...................................... Windscreen washer fluid see Windscreen washer system Windscreen washer system Notes ............................................. Topping up ..................................... Windscreen wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... Rear window wiper ........................ Replacing the wiper blades ............ Switching on/off ........................... Winter operation Important safety notes .................. Radiator cover ............................... Slippery road surfaces ................... Snow chains .................................. Winter tyres Limiting the speed (on-board computer) ............................................. M+S tyres ...................................... Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... Important safety notes .................. Replacing ....................................... Replacing (on the rear window) ..... Replacing (windscreen) .................. Wooden load compartment floor (cleaning instructions) ...................... Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop 337 146 406 332 136 134 134 133 366 329 185 367 255 366 337 134 134 135 134 341 340 Z ZONE function Switching on/off ........................... 146 Introduction Protection of the environment General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. Our objectives are to use the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into consideration. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle personal driving style You can influence both factors. Therefore, please bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ryour short trips, as these increase fuel consumption. Robserve the correct tyre pressure. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in the vehicle. Rremove the roof rack once you no longer need it. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rall maintenance work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. off the engine in stationary traffic. Rmonitor the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rswitch Returning an end-of-life vehicle EU countries only: Mercedes-Benz will take back your old vehicle to dispose of it in an environmentally-responsible manner in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive. There is a network of return points and disassembly plants available. You can return your vehicle to these plants free of charge. This makes a valuable contribution to the recycling process and the conservation of resources. For further information on recycling old vehicles, recovery and the terms of the policy, visit the Mercedes-Benz homepage. Ravoid Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars sills Rseats Rdashboard Rinstrument cluster Rcentre console Rdoor Z 23 24 Introduction Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre. In Germany, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. This also applies to some other countries. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. This is the case: Rif they cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted Rif other road users could be endangered Rif the emission or noise levels are adversely affected Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine MercedesBenz parts (Y page 398). Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase contract documentation for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should kept in the vehicle. Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or necessary repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as necessary repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Introduction G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring could effect their function and/or the operation of other networked components. This could in particular also be the case for systems relevant to safety. They might not function properly any more and/or jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. Always have work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If the underbody panelling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody panelling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If, upon continuing your journey, you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Declarations of conformity Wireless vehicle components If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. The following information applies to all components of the vehicle and the information systems and communication devices integrated into the vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio waves: The components of this vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and all other relevant conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Electromagnetic compatibility Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb or a pothole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed for. The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation ECE-R 10. Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 25 26 Introduction G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it can affect the operation of the vehicle systems. This may affect the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Service Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop: Rwork relevant to safety and maintenance work Rservice Rrepair work Rmodifications, installations and conversions Rwork on electronic components Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases: Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer. Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example. Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual technical data in this manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Rthe Introduction Implied warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions are not covered either by Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Data stored in the vehicle A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about: Rthe vehicle's operating state Revents Rfaults In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of stability control systems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in recognising and rectifying faults and defects Ranalyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident Roptimise vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory and fault data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services processes Rwarranty events Rquality assurance It is read by employees of the service network (including manufacturers) using special diagnostic testers. More detailed information is obtained from it, if required. After a fault has been rectified, the information is deleted from the fault memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connection with other information (if necessary, under consultation with an authorised expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Rservice Raccident reports to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency. Rdamage Z 27 28 Introduction Copyright information General notes Information on licences for free and opensource software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource 29 Cockpit ................................................. 30 Multifunction steering wheel ............. 35 Centre console .................................... 36 Overhead control panel ...................... 39 Door control panel .............................. 40 At a glance Instrument cluster .............................. 32 30 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel gearshift paddles 173 ; Combination switch 125 = Instrument cluster 32 ? Horn A DIRECT SELECT lever 168 B PARKTRONIC warning display C Function Page F Adjusts the steering wheel manually 113 G Adjusts the steering wheel electrically Steering wheel heating 113 114 H Cruise control lever 186 I Parking brake 181 207 J Diagnostics connection Overhead control panel 39 K Opens the bonnet 328 D Climate control systems 138 L Releases the parking brake 181 E Ignition lock Start/Stop button 159 159 M Light switch 122 N Night View Assist Plus 220 25 31 At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Overhead control panel ; PARKTRONIC warning display 207 = Combination switch 125 ? Instrument cluster 32 A Horn B DIRECT SELECT lever 168 C Steering wheel gearshift paddles 173 D Light switch 122 E Night View Assist Plus 220 F Releases the parking brake 181 39 Function Page G Opens the bonnet H Diagnostics connection I Ignition lock Start/Stop button 159 159 J Adjusts the steering wheel manually 113 K Adjusts the steering wheel electrically Steering wheel heating 113 114 L Cruise control lever 186 M Parking brake 181 N Climate control systems 138 328 25 32 Instrument cluster At a glance Instrument cluster Displays i Instrument cluster: kilometres Function Function Page : Speedometer with segments 241 ; Multifunction display 242 i Set the instrument cluster lighting via the on-board computer (Y page 252). Page = Rev counter 240 ? Coolant temperature 240 A Fuel gauge 33 At a glance Instrument cluster i Instrument cluster: miles Function Function Page : Speedometer with segments 241 ; Multifunction display 242 i Set the instrument cluster lighting via the on-board computer (Y page 252). Page = Rev counter 240 ? Coolant temperature 240 A Fuel gauge 34 Instrument cluster At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function : Page Function Page G ü Seat belts 287 H % Diesel engine: preglow ÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles 161 292 291 I ? Coolant 295 #! Turn signals 125 J A J Brakes (red) 288 K Main-beam headlamps 126 B J Only for certain vehicles: brakes (yellow) K 288 L Dipped-beam headlamps 123 C ! ABS 289 L T Side lamps 124 D 6 Restraint system M R Rear foglamp 124 E ; Engine diagnostics 295 N 8 Reserve fuel 295 F h Tyre pressure monitor 298 ÷ ESP® M SPORT handling mode in AMG vehicles 291 ; · Distance warning 297 = å ESP® OFF ? 292 42 Multifunction steering wheel 35 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Audio/COMAND display, see the separate operating instructions = ? Switches on LINGUATRONIC; see the separate operating instructions ? ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits telephone book/ redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute Page 242 Function A B 247 =; Selects a menu 9: Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms the selection Hides display messages % Back Switches off LINGUATRONIC; see the separate operating instructions Page 241 241 241 261 241 36 Centre console At a glance Centre console Centre console, upper section Function Page : Audio system/COMAND Online; see the separate operating instructions ; c Seat heating 111 = s Seat ventilation 112 ? c PARKTRONIC 207 A ¤ start/stop function 163 B 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 59 Function C £ Hazard warning lamps D u Rear-window roller sunblind (CLS Coupé) Ü Lowers the rear seat head restraints (CLS Shooting Brake) E & Auxiliary heating Page 126 315 108 150 Centre console 37 At a glance Centre console, lower section Function F Page Stowage compartment Ashtray Cigarette lighter Power socket Cup holders 300 315 317 317 313 G e Adjusts the suspension setting 204 H É Sets the vehicle level 202 Function Page I Stowage compartment with Media Interface 302 J Ú Selects the drive program 171 K COMAND controller; see the separate operating instructions 38 Centre console At a glance Centre console, lower section (AMG vehicles) Function Page F Cup holders 313 G Engages parking position P 181 H Selector lever 168 I Ashtray Cigarette lighter Power socket 315 317 317 J COMAND controller; see the separate operating instructions Function Page K Stowage compartment with Media Interface 302 L ß Calls up/saves the suspension setting 205 M à Adjusts the suspension setting 205 N å ESP® O Drive program selector 74 172 Overhead control panel 39 At a glance Overhead control panel Function Page : u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off ; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 131 = p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 130 ? ë Deactivates towaway protection A Rear-view mirror 131 79 117 Function Page B Buttons for the garage door opener 320 C 3 Opens/closes the sliding sunroof 100 D ê Deactivates the interior motion sensor 79 E p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off 130 F c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 131 40 Door control panel At a glance Door control panel Function : Page r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel 119 ; Adjusts the seats electrically 106 = % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle 89 ? Opens the door 89 A 7Zö\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 116 Function Page B W Opens/closes the side windows 96 C n Activates/deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment 69 p Opens/closes the boot lid/tailgate 94 D 41 Useful information .............................. 42 Panic alarm .......................................... 42 Occupant safety .................................. 42 Pets in the vehicle .............................. 69 Driving safety systems ....................... 69 Anti-theft systems .............................. 78 Safety Children in the vehicle ........................ 55 Occupant safety 42 Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Safety els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 26). Occupant safety Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. Furthermore, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. The restraint system includes: RSeat belt system RAirbags RChild Panic alarm restraint system seat securing system The various components of the restraint system work complementary to one another. It can only provide maximum protection if all vehicle occupants: RChild Rhave To activate: press ! button : for approximately one second. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle. X i The panic alarm function is only available in certain countries. their seat belt correctly fastened (Y page 45) Rhave correctly adjusted their seat and head restraint (Y page 105). As the driver, you must also ensure that the steering wheel is correctly adjusted. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 104). Additionally, you must ensure that an airbag can deploy freely (Y page 48). An airbag is supplementary to a correctly fastened seatbelt and, as an additional safety device, provides greater protection for vehicle occupants in an accident situation. If the protection provided by the seat belt is sufficient, the airbags do not deploy. Furthermore, in the event of an accident, only airbags which provide greater protection in the given accident situation deploy. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on how the restraint system operates can be found in "Deployment of the seat belt tensioner and airbags" (Y page 51). See "Children in the vehicle" for further information on children travelling in the vehicle as well as on child restraint systems (Y page 55). Important safety notes G WARNING If the restraint system is modified, it may no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function by failing in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for example. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. This can effect belt tensioners or airbags, for example. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp If it is necessary to modify an airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorised Mercedes-Benz Centre. Restraint system warning lamp The operation of the restraint system is checked when the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is running. This allows malfunctions to be quickly identified. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. The various components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up when the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds while the engine is running Rlights up again while the engine is running PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : is part of the automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat. A permanently lit PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp informs you that the frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. Depending on the person in the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag must either be disabled or enabled. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front airbag is enabled or disabled depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. Therefore, always observe the information on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 55). There you will also find instructions on backwards and forwardsZ 43 Safety Occupant safety Safety 44 Occupant safety facing child restraint systems on the frontpassenger seat. RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts" (Y page 44) and "Airbags" (Y page 48). There you can also find information on the correct seat position. Observe the information on automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat (Y page 59). Seat belts Introduction A correctly fastened seat belt is the most effective means of limiting the movement of a vehicle occupant during a collision or in the event that the vehicle overturns. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from it. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to a deployed airbag. The seat belt system consists of: Rseat belts tensioners for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear Rseat belt force limiters for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear If the seat belt is pulled quickly or suddenly from the belt sash guide, the inertia reel locks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out further. In an impact, the belt tensioner tightens the belt to pull it close to the body. It does not pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction of the seat backrest, however. In addition, the belt tensioner cannot compensate for the seat position being incorrect or for an incorrectly worn seat belt. If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt force limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted Rbelt by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is reduced. The belt force limiters on the front seats are synchronised with the front airbags, which take on a part of the deceleration force. This helps to reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. ! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the co-driver's seat. Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be triggered in the event of an accident and would have to be replaced. Important safety notes G WARNING The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function if it is not fastened correctly. Also, an improperly fastened seat belt can cause additional injuries in the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always make sure that all vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belt and positioned correctly. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly without a suitable, addi- Occupant safety If you are travelling with a child younger than 12 years of age and under 1.50 m tall in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Rensure that you observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" in these Operating Instructions (Y page 55) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions G WARNING Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if: Rthey are damaged, have been modified, are extremely dirty, bleached or dyed seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rmodifications have been made to the belt tensioners, belt anchorages or inertia reels Damage caused to safety belts in an accident may not be visible, e.g. by splinters of glass. Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, for example in the event of an accident. Modified seat belt tensioners may be deployed unintentionally or fail to be deployed when required. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify safety belts, seat belt tensioners, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not damaged or worn and are clean. After an accident, have Rthe the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by MercedesBenz. Correct seat belt use Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 44). All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion. When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt buckle belonging to that seat. Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can forces which occur be distributed across the surface of the seat belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the centre of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm. If possible, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height. Rthe lap belt passes across your lap as tightly and as low down as possible. The lap must always be routed across your hip joints and never across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, press the lap belt down into your hip joints and pull tight with the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects. If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or spectacles, store these in a suitable place. Z Safety tional restraint system. The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function if it is not fastened correctly. Also, an improperly fastened seat belt can cause additional injuries in the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint system. 45 Occupant safety 46 Safety Ronly one person is using a seat belt. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 300). automatically, see "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. Fastening and adjusting the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 44) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 45). If the centre rear seat belt is being used, also observe the information about the seat belt for the centre rear seat (Y page 46). The shoulder section of the seat belt must always be routed across the centre of the shoulder. Adjust the belt sash guide if necessary. To raise: slide the belt guide upwards. The belt guide will engage in various positions. X To lower: hold belt guide release : and slide the belt guide downwards. X Let go of belt guide release : in the desired position and make sure that the belt guide engages. X Seat belt for the centre rear seat (CLS Shooting Brake) Adjust the seat (Y page 104). The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt sash guide = and engage belt tongue ; into belt buckle :. The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened X If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded down and back up again, the rear centre seat belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be pulled out. X To release the rear centre seat belt: pull the seat belt out approximately 20 mm at the belt outlet on the backrest and then release it again. The seat belt is retracted and released. Releasing the seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue Occupant safety Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder for all vehicle occupants to fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. A warning tone may also sound. The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone switches off as soon as the driver and co-driver have fastened their seat belts. i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see the "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belt" section (Y page 287). Rear seat belt status indicator X Press release button : and guide belt tongue ; back towards belt sash guide =. Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This function adjusts the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Rthe seat belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle and Rthe ignition is switched on The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer (Y page 257). The seat belt on the right rear seat, when viewed in the direction of travel, is not fastened. (Example: CLS Coupé) The status indicator for the rear-compartment seat belts is only available for certain countries. For approximately 30 seconds, the rear seat belt status indicator informs you which rear seat belt is not fastened. The rear seat belt status indicator appears if: Ryou drive off and reach a speed of approximately 10 km/h. Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten their seat belts while the vehicle is in motion. Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle and you pull away again. You can also cancel the rear seat belt status indicator immediately (Y page 261). Z Safety will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 47 48 Occupant safety Airbags Safety Introduction The AIRBAG symbol indicates the installation location of an airbag. The airbag is supplementary to a correctly fastened seatbelt. It does not replace a seatbelt. The airbag serves to provide additional protection in an accident situation. Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The various airbag systems work independently of one another (Y page 51). However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. Due to the speed of airbag deployment, it is also not possible to entirely rule out the risk of injuries caused by the driver's airbag deploying. Important safety notes G WARNING If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function and can even cause additional injuries when deployed. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. In order to avoid such risks, always ensure that all vehicle occupants: Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, including pregnant women Rare seated correctly and maintain the furthest possible distance from the airbags Robserve the following notes Always ensure that there are no objects located between the airbag and the vehicle occupant. RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The centre of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. RFor this reason, always secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. If a child is travelling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under 12 years of age and less than 1.50 m tall in suitable child restraint systems. RChild restraint systems should be fitted to the rear seats. ROnly secure a child to the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front airbag is disabled, and only then in a rearwardfacing child restraint system. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled (Y page 43). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 55) and on the "Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 61) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Occupant safety are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. Front airbags Safety Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the airbag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere G WARNING If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an airbag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door panelling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. This poses an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door panelling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 49 Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. When deployed, the front airbags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats. The permanently lit PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows you that the frontpassenger front airbag is deactivated (Y page 43). Driver's kneebag Driver's kneebag : deploys under the steering column. The driver's kneebag is triggered together with the front airbag. The driver's kneebag offers additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupant in the driver's seat. i The driver's kneebag is only available in certain countries. Z 50 Occupant safety Safety Sidebags G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even prevent deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. The airbags may then fail to protect the vehicle occupants as intended. Operation of the automatic child seat recognition may also be impaired. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Use only seat covers which have been specifically approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. Operation of the automatic child seat recognition may also be impaired. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Use only seat covers which have been specifically approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. Example: CLS Coupé, pelvisbag on the driver's side Example: Coupé Front sidebags : and rear sidebags ; deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the sidebag offers additional thorax protection. However, it does not protect the: Pelvisbags : deploy below next to the outer seat cushions. When activated, the pelvisbag enhances the level of protection of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The pelvisbag is deployed on the side of the impact. i Pelvisbags are only available in certain countries. Windowbags Rhead Rneck Rarms In the event of a side impact, the sidebag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. Pelvisbags G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even prevent deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. The airbags may then fail to protect the vehicle occupants as intended. Example: Coupé Windowbags : are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. When deployed, the windowbag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the chest or arms. In the event of a side impact, the windowbag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a windowbag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 51). Deployment of belt tensioners and airbags Important safety notes G WARNING After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts are hot. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which have been triggered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that after an accident, you have your vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop. This is particularly important after the seat belt tensioners have been triggered or after airbags have been deployed. An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible. If belt tensioners are triggered or the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard but can cause short-term breathing difficulties for people with asthma or breathing problems. If it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open a window to avoid experiencing potential breathing difficulties. Mode of operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the seat belt tensioner is triggered by the restraint system control unit in the event of a frontal or rear collision. The belt tensioner can only be triggered if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational; see the "Restraint system warning lamp" section (Y page 43) Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the belt buckle on your front seat The belt tensioners in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. In certain frontal collision situations, further components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other if the restraint system control unit determines that the accident is severe: Rfront airbags and driver's kneebag if it is determined that it can offer additional protection to the seat belt for vehicle occupants Depending on the classification of the person in the front-passenger seat, the frontRwindowbag, Z 51 Safety Occupant safety Safety 52 Occupant safety passenger front airbag is disabled or enabled. Only when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit, can the co-driver's airbag be deployed in the event of an accident. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp (Y page 43). Your vehicle has two-stage front airbags. In the first deployment stage, the front airbag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front airbag is fully deployed if a second deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds. The evaluation of the activation threshold for a seat belt tensioner and airbag involves an assessment of the deceleration or acceleration dynamics that occur at different points on the vehicle. This process functions preemptively. Deployment must take place promptly at the beginning of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of the force during the impact Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after the collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle can be substantially deformed without the driver's airbag being deployed. This is the case if only relatively easily deformable vehicle parts are affected by the collision and a high deceleration threshold is not reached. On the other hand, airbags may be deployed even though the vehicle only displays minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. When the restraint system control unit detects a side impact or determines that the vehicle has overturned, the corresponding components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other, depending on the type of accident that has occurred. If the system determines in this situation that it can offer additional protection for vehicle occupants, the seat belt tensioners are also triggered. RSidebags and pelvisbag on the side on which impact occurs, independent of the belt tensioner and seat belt use Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the co-driver's seat: the sidebag and pelvisbag on the co-driver's side deploy under the following conditions: - an occupant is detected on the co-driver's seat, or - the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the belt buckle on the co-driver's seat RThe windowbag on the side on which impact occurs, independent of seat belt use and regardless of whether the co-driver's seat is occupied RWindowbags on the driver's and co-driver's sides in certain situations where the vehicle overturns, if it is determined that they can offer additional protection to the seat belt for vehicle occupants i Not all airbags are deployed in an acci- dent. The various airbag systems work independently of one another. How the airbag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration, and the apparent type of accident: Rfrontal collision impact Roverturn Rside Occupant safety Important safety notes G WARNING The function of the head restraint may be impaired if you: Rattach objects such as coat hangers to the head restraints, for example Ruse unsuitable head restraint covers If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfil their intended protective function in the event of an accident. In addition, objects attached to the head restraints could endanger other vehicle occupants. This poses an increased risk of injury. Do not attach any objects to the head restraints and only use suitable head restraint covers. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre regarding the availability of suitable seat or head restraint covers. Operation NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints offer additional protection against head and chest injuries. In the event of a rear collision of a certain severity, the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and frontpassenger seats are moved forwards and upwards. This provides better head support. If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints have been triggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats (Y page 54). Otherwise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints that have been triggered are moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the functionality of the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a rear-end collision. Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO head restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head restraint NECK-PRO head restraints Example: Coupé Do not insert your finger between the upholstery of the head restraint and the cover. Pay particular attention while resetting the NECKPRO head restraints. X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :. X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion down in the direction of arrow ; as far as it will go. X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECKPRO head restraint cushion backwards in the direction of arrow = until it engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO head restraint. i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Safety NECK-PRO head restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints 53 54 Occupant safety NECK-PRO luxury head restraint PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Introduction Safety In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. Important safety notes ! Make sure that there are no objects in the Example: Coupé Do not insert your finger between the upholstery of the head restraint and the cover. Pay particular attention while resetting the NECKPRO luxury head restraints. X Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle document wallet. X Slide resetting tool : into guide ; between the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint and the rear cover of the head restraint. X Push resetting tool : downwards until you hear the head restraint deployment mechanism engage. X Pull out resetting tool :. X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECKPRO luxury head restraint cushion backwards in the direction of arrow = until it engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO luxury head restraint. X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle document wallet. i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK- PRO luxury head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. footwell or behind the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated. Although your vehicle is equipped with PRESAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of an accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. Function PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys- ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely Ron vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: if BAS PLUS brakes hard or the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof and the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. Rif Children in the vehicle with the memory function: the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavourable position. RVehicles with a multicontour seat or active multicontour seat: the air pressure in the side bolsters of the backrest is increased. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour seats/active multicontour seats, the air pressure in the side bolsters is reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary. Seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Further information can be found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47). Automatic measures after an accident Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rthe electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised Rthe engine is switched off Rvehicles with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system: automatic emergency call Rthe Children in the vehicle Important safety notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there. If a child younger than 12 years old and under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Rstart G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. Z Safety Rvehicles 55 Safety 56 Children in the vehicle G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 44) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 45). Child restraint system Observe the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (Y page 63). For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use a child restraint system recommended by Mercedes-Benz (Y page 66). G WARNING If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted on the seat position suitable for this purpose, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use for the child restraint system. Make sure that the entire surface of the child restraint system is resting on the seat surface. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is fitted incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always fit child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 300). G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident cannot perform their intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident. Have the child restraint securing systems checked in a qualified specialist workshop before fitting a child restraint system again. If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 61). You can also find information on disabling the front-passenger front airbag. Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. Children in the vehicle 57 i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care Safety products to clean child restraint systems recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain information about this at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ISOFIX child seat securing system G WARNING ISOFIX child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 22 kg who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. The child could, for example, not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 22 kg, only use ISOFIX child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (Y page 63). Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX securing rings. ! When fitting the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the centre seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could be damaged. Example: Coupé When installing the ISOFIX child restraint system, fold protective caps ; of securing rings : inwards. X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system on both ISOFIX securing rings :. ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. ISOFIX securing rings : for two ISOFIX child restraint systems are fitted on the left and right of the rear seats. Secure child restraint systems without an ISOFIX child seat securing system using the seat belts in the vehicle. When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (Y page 63). Top Tether Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with ISOFIX and the vehicle. It helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is fitted with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used. Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an acciZ Safety 58 Children in the vehicle dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are in an upright position. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. Top Tether anchorages CLS Coupé Move head restraint : upwards. Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Route Top Tether belt A under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether anchorage =. X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twisted. X Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X If necessary, move head restraint : back down again slightly (Y page 108). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt A. X X CLS Shooting Brake The Top Tether anchorage points are located in the rear compartment behind the head restraints. The Top Tether anchorages are attached to the rear of the rear seat backrests. Children in the vehicle 59 lights up and remains lit. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled. abled by the automatic child seat recognition, the following remain enabled on the front-passenger side: Rthe sidebag pelvisbag Rthe windowbag Rthe belt tensioner Rthe Move head restraint : upwards. Remove luggage compartment cover ; (Y page 306). X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Route Top Tether belt B under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. X Hook Top Tether hook A into Top Tether anchorage ? on the back of rear seat backrest =. X Make sure that Top Tether belt B is not twisted. X Tension Top Tether belt B. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X If necessary, move head restraint : back down again slightly (Y page 108). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt B. X Fit luggage compartment cover ; (Y page 306). X X Automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat The sensor system for child restraint systems in the front-passenger seat detects whether a special Mercedes-Benz child restraint system with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted. In this case, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp G WARNING If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-passenger front airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Only suitable rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems may be installed on the front-passenger seat. Always observe the information about suitable positioning of the child restraint system in this Owner's Manual as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Z Safety i If the front-passenger front airbag is dis- 60 Children in the vehicle Safety G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the information about suitable positioning of the child restraint system in this Owner's Manual as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. i Ensure that your vehicle is equipped with automatic child seat recognition for the front-passenger seat (Y page 61). If this is not the case, always fit the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat (Y page 63). PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : shows you whether the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock, or press the Start/Stop button once or twice on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. The system carries out a self-diagnosis. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up for approximately six seconds. If, after the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Ris lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. They will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. Ris not lit, the sensor system did not detect a child restraint system with transponder for automatic child seat recognition. If, in the case of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front airbag is deployed. G WARNING Electronic devices on the front-passenger seat can affect the function of the automatic child seat recognition, for example: Rlaptop Rmobile phone cards such as ski passes or access passes The front-passenger front airbag could deploy unintentionally or not function as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any of the devices mentioned above or similar devices on the frontpassenger seat. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front airbag both before and during the journey. Rtransponder Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat General notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat: if it is absolutely necessary to fit a child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, always observe the information on the "Automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 59). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: off, the front-passenger front airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Vehicles without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat Ra child restraint system that is not detected by the automatic child seat recognition sensor system Rthe unintentional disabling of the frontpassenger front airbag Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard Please observe the warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor, see the illustration. G WARNING If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle is not equipped with automatic child seat recognition, this is indicated by a special sticker. The sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard on the front-passenger side. The sticker is visible when you open the frontpassenger door. If you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up briefly. It has no function, however, and does not indicate that the frontpassenger seat is equipped with automatic child seat recognition. In this case, always fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat (Y page 63). Observe the following information under "Rearward-facing child restraint system" and "Forward-facing child restraint system" as well as information on the suitable positionZ 61 Safety Children in the vehicle 62 Children in the vehicle ing of the child restraint system (Y page 63). Safety Rearward-facing child restraint system Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to fit a rearwardfacing child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 43) is the front-passenger front airbag disabled. Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 63) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Forward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to fit a forwardfacing child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the frontpassenger seat accordingly. Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 63) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Children in the vehicle 63 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console is lit. A special Mercedes-Benz child restraint system with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front airbag has therefore been disabled as desired. There is no child restraint system fitted to the front-passenger seat. Automatic child seat recognition is malfunctioning, for example due to electronic devices on the front-passenger seat. X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, e.g.: Rlaptop Rmobile phone Ra card with a transponder, such as a ski pass or access pass If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up briefly when you switch the ignition on. G WARNING Automatic child seat recognition is malfunctioning. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you fit the restraint system to a suitable rear seat. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Please also refer to the notes about the restraint system warning lamp (Y page 266). Suitable positioning of the child restraint system Introduction Only child restraint systems which are approved in accordance with the ECE standard ECE R44 are permitted for use in the vehicle. Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat – if it is absolutely necessary to secure a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat: Always pay attention to the instructions under "Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat" (Y page 61). There you will find instructions on how to correctly route the shoulder belt strap from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system (Y page 62). X Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. X Z Safety Problems with automatic child seat recognition Children in the vehicle 64 Move the belt height adjustment to the lowest position. X Move the backrest to an almost vertical position. The bottom and back of a forward-facing child restraint system must make full contact with the front-passenger seat cushion and backrest. The child restraint system must not touch the roof. Adjust the backrest angle accordingly. Also observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Safety X "Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label and the text "Universal". Example: approval label on the child restraint system "Universal" category child restraint systems can be used on the seats indicated with U, UF or IUF according to the tables "Suitability of the seats for attaching belted child restraint systems" or "Suitability of the seats for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system". Semi-universal child restraint systems are indicated by the text "Semi-universal" on the approval label. These can be used if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website. Suitability of the seats for attaching belted child restraint systems Legend for the table: X Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use in this weight category UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category and are approved for use in this weight category L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended; see the table "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 66). Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. (▲) Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: a "Universal" category child restraint system with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition must be fitted. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre console must light up. Front-passenger seat Weight categories Frontpassenger front airbag is not disabled Frontpassenger front airbag is disabled Category 0: up to 10 kg X U (▲), L (▲) Category 0+: up to 13 kg X U (▲), L (▲) Children in the vehicle Category I (attaching a forwardfacing child restraint system): 9 to 18 kg Frontpassenger front airbag is not disabled Frontpassenger front airbag is disabled UF, L U, L Category I U, L (attaching a rearwardfacing child restraint system): 9 to 18 kg U, L Category II: UF, L 15 to 25 kg U, L Category III: 22 to 36 kg U, L UF, L Rear seats Weight categories Left, right Centre (CLS Shooting Brake only) Category 0: up to 10 kg U, L U Category 0+: up to 13 kg U, L U Category I: 9 to 18 kg U, L U Category II: U, L 15 to 25 kg U Category III: 22 to 36 kg U U, L Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems Legend for the table: X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight category and/or size category. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the "universal" category which are approved for use in this weight category. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 66). The manufacturer will also recommend a suitable ISOFIX child restraint system. For this, your vehicle and the seat must be listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website. Carry-cot weight category Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right F ISO/L1 X G ISO/L2 X Weight category 0: up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right E ISO/R1 IL Z Safety Weight categories 65 66 Children in the vehicle Safety Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right E ISO/R1 IL D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg approximately 9 months to 4 years Recommended child restraint systems Weight category 0: up to 10 kg; up to approximately 6 months Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer Type BABY SAFE plus BABY SAFE plus II Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301146 04 301146 04 301146 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 10 00 970 20 00 Colour code: Colour code: 9H95 9H95 Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and right D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL B ISO/F2 IUF Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer B1 ISO/F2X IUF Type A ISO/F3 IUF BABY SAFE plus BABY SAFE plus II Approval number (E1 ...) 03 30114 6 04 30114 6 04 301146 Recommended child restraint systems General notes Always observe the information in "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 61) and in "Suitable positioning of the child restraint system" (Y page 63). You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg; up to approximately 15 months Order 970 10 00 970 20 00 number Colour Colour code: (A 000 ...) code: 9H95 9H95 Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg; approximately 9 months to 4 years Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer Type DUO plus DUO plus Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301133 04 301133 03 301133 04 301133 Children in the vehicle 970 11 00 970 16 00 Automatic child seat recognition Yes No Suggested "Universal"/"Semi-Universal" category ISOFIX child restraint systems: Carry-cot weight category Size categories F, G Manufacturer – Manufacturer Britax Römer Type – Type DUO plus Approval number (E1 ...) – Approval number (E1 ...) 04 301133 Order number – 970 21 00 Colour code: 9H95 Automatic child seat recognition – Order number (A 000 ...) Weight category II/III: 15 to 36 kg; approximately 4 to 12 years Category 0: up to 10 kg Size category E Manufacturer – Type – Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer Type KIDFIX KIDFIX Approval number (E1 ...) – Approval number (E1 ...) 04 301198 04 301198 Order number – Automatic child seat recognition – Order number (A 000 ...) 970 18 00 970 19 00 Automatic child seat recognition Yes No Manufacturer Britax Römer Type KIDFIX Approval number (E1 ...) 04 301198 Order number (A 000 ...) 970 22 00 Colour code: 9H95 Safety Order number (A 000 ...) 67 Category 0+: up to 13 kg Size categories E D, C Manufacturer Britax Römer – Type BABY SAFE plus – Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301146 04 301146 – Order number B6 6 86 8224 – Category I: 9 to 18 kg Size categories D, C, B, A Manufacturer – Type – Z Safety 68 Children in the vehicle Approval number (E1 ...) – Order number – Automatic child seat recognition – Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are travelling in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Override feature for: Size category B1 Manufacturer Britax Römer Britax Römer Type DUO plus DUO plus Approval number (E1 ...) 03 301133 04 301133 03 301133 04 301133 Order number A 000 970 11 00 A 000 970 16 00 B1 Rthe Rthe Size category B1 Manufacturer Britax Römer Type DUO plus Approval number (E1 ...) 04 301133 Order number A 000 970 22 00 Child-proof locks Important safety notes G WARNING If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thus endangering other people or road users Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example There is a risk of an accident and injury. rear doors (Y page 69) rear side windows (Y page 69) G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Rstart G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Driving safety systems Child-proof locks for the rear doors only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. Safety Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Pets in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave animals unsupervised or unsecured in the vehicle, they may push a button or a switch, for example. They could: Ractivate Rear door child-proof lock (example: CLS Coupé) You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;. Override feature for the rear side windows vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Rswitch vehicle systems on or off, thus endangering other road users In the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction, unsecured animals could be flung around the vehicle, injuring the vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals correctly during a journey, e.g. in an animal transport box. Driving safety systems Driving safety systems overview In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is 69 (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 70) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 70) RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) (Y page 71) RAdaptive brake lamps (Y page 72) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 72) REBD (electronic brake force distribution) (Y page 76) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 76) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 76) Z 70 Driving safety systems Safety Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. i The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tyres and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tyres, recommended minimum tyre tread depths etc. (Y page 364). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General notes ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 289) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 262). ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/hupwards, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. Brakes If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. X If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions; this serves as a reminder to take extra care while driving. BAS (Brake Assist) General notes BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Driving safety systems i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Braking X Keep the brake pedal depressed firmly until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). Important safety notes G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, BAS PLUS may: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot G WARNING BAS PLUS does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. For BAS PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor system must be: In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, detection can be impaired. Detection by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Ractivated (Y Rdirt page 255) Roperational With the aid of the radar sensor system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS. on the sensors or obscured sensors by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the radar sensor settings and operation checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Rinterference Z Safety Important safety notes 71 Driving safety systems 72 Function To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if: Safety Ryou approach an obstacle and PLUS has detected a risk of collision When driving at a speed under 30 km/h: if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated. Braking assistance from BAS PLUS is carried out at the last possible moment. When driving at a speed above 30 km/h: if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically increases the brake pressure to a degree suited to the traffic situation. BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds above 7 km/h. At speeds of up to approximately 70 km/h, BAS PLUS can also detect stationary objects. Examples of stationary objects are stopped or parked vehicles. RBAS i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes function as usual, if: Ryou release the brake pedal is no longer a risk of collision Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle Rthere Adaptive brake lamps i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). The adaptive brake lights warn following traffic in an emergency braking situation: Rby flashing brake lamps hazard warning lamps are activated Rthe If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning button (Y page 126). ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tyres and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehicle during braking. ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active if you deactivate ESP®. Important safety notes Characteristics of ESP® i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- General notes If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. tion (Y page 70). G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the ignition when the parking brake is being tested using a dynamometer. Application of the brakes by ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake system. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per- formance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. Before operating the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified specialist workshop. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system. Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 359). ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 291) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 262). i Only use wheels with the recommended tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. If ESP® intervenes: Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. Deactivating/activating ESP® (except AMG vehicles) Important safety notes You can select between the following statuses of ESP: RESP® RESP® is activated is deactivated G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. Z 73 Safety Driving safety systems Driving safety systems 74 It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Safety Rin i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Deactivating/activating ESP® X To deactivate: (Y page 250). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To activate: (Y page 250). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability Rengine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. Rtraction control is still activated RESP® still provides support when you brake Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG vehicles) Important safety notes You can select between the following statuses of ESP: RESP® is activated handling mode is activated RESP® is deactivated RSPORT G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. It may be best to activate SPORT handling mode in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Ron specially designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ESP® requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver. Rin i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Deactivating/activating ESP® Driving safety systems X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The ÷ OFF message appears in the multifunction display. X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP® ON message appears in the multifunction display. Characteristics of activated SPORT handling mode If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle to a limited degree. When SPORT handling mode is activated: RESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree Rtraction control is still activated Rengine torque is restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels are able to spin The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. RESP® still provides support when you brake Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability torque is restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels are able to spin The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. Rtraction control is still activated RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available; it is also not activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RESP® still provides support when you brake Rengine ESP® trailer stabilisation General notes If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilised. Important safety notes G WARNING If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is a risk of an accident. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, you can only stabilise the vehicle/ trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of about 65 km/h. Z Safety To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display. X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X 75 76 Driving safety systems ESP® trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. PRE-SAFE® Brake General notes Safety i Observe the "Important safety notes" secEBD (electronic brake force distribution) General notes EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion for driving safety systems (Y page 70). G WARNING If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 289) as well as display messages (Y page 264). ADAPTIVE BRAKE i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 70). ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 200) and hill start assist (Y page 162). tion (Y page 70). PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be: Ractivated (Y page 255) Roperational With the help of the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRESAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. Important safety notes G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you also brake. Automatic emergency braking cannot prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene There is a risk of an accident. Driving safety systems In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Rto As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, detection can be impaired. Detection by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the radar sensor settings and operation checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Rinterference Function X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 250). If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display. This function will issue a warning if: Rat a speed of around 30 km/h or more the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient for several seconds. The · distance warning lamp then lights up in the instrument cluster. Rat a speed of approximately 7 km/h or more, you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. The PRE-SAFE® Brake function can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions: Rthe driver and front passenger have their seat belts fastened and Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately 7 km/h and 200 km/h At speeds of up to approximately 70 km/h PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect stationary objects. Examples of stationary objects are stopped or parked vehicles. You can prevent the intervention of PRESAFE® Brake at any time by: Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further kickdown Rreleasing the brake pedal Ractivating Z Safety Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. 77 78 Anti-theft systems The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle is no longer any danger of a collision Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE® Brake detects a risk of a collision, the system will alert you both visually and acoustically. If you do not brake or take evasive action, the system will warn you by automatically braking the vehicle gently. If there is an increased risk of collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated (Y page 54). If a risk of collision remains at speeds over 30 km/h and you do not brake, take evasive action or significantly accelerate, automatic braking may be performed up to a level of automatic emergency braking. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an accident that can no longer be avoided. ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Ryou Safety Rthere To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds. X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. X A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open: Ra door vehicle with the emergency key element Rthe boot lid/tailgate Rthe bonnet X To turn the alarm off with the key: press the % or & button on the key. The alarm is switched off. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. Rthe Anti-theft systems Immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. X To activate with the key: remove the key from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid key has been left inside the vehicle. i The immobiliser is always deactivated when you start the engine. X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The key must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. Anti-theft systems Function An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This can occur if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. Activating Make sure that: Rthe doors are closed Rthe boot lid/tailgate is closed Only then is the tow-away protection primed. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. Tow-away protection is primed after approximately 30 seconds. X Deactivating X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is switched off automatically. Deactivating Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. Tow-away protection is deactivated. X Tow-away protection remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again and door is opened and closed again and Rthe vehicle is locked again To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the towaway protection if you lock your vehicle and it: Ra Ris being transported being loaded onto a ferry or car transporter, for example Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a split-level garage Ris Interior motion sensor Function When the interior motion sensor is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. This can occur if someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for example. Activating Make sure that: Rthe side windows are closed Rthe sliding sunroof is closed Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hanging on the rear-view mirror or on the grab handles on the roof trim This will prevent false alarms. X Make sure that: Rthe doors are closed Rthe sliding sunroof is closed Rthe boot lid/tailgate is closed Only then is the interior motion sensor primed. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. The interior motion sensor is primed after approximately 30 seconds. X Z Safety Tow-away protection 79 Anti-theft systems 80 Deactivating Safety X Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. The interior motion sensor is automatically deactivated. Deactivating Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; flashes briefly. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. The interior motion sensor is deactivated. X The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again and Ra door is opened and closed again and Rthe vehicle is locked again To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the interior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle and: Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle Rthe side windows remain open Rthe sliding sunroof remains open i UK only: your vehicle is equipped with a double lock function. The doors cannot be opened from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key or with KEYLESSGO (Y page 89). Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 88). 81 Useful information .............................. 82 Key ....................................................... 82 Doors .................................................... 88 Boot/luggage compartment .............. 91 Side windows ...................................... 96 Opening and closing Sliding sunroof .................................... 99 82 Key Useful information Opening and closing i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 26). Key Important safety notes United Kingdom only: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the double-lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double-lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 79). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 78). All countries: G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per- sons or road users out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rget Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the key, the key could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before inserting the key into the ignition lock. ! Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. Key Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the key's functionality. Key functions When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 254). KEYLESS-GO General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle. Locking and unlocking centrally : & To lock the vehicle ; F To unlock the boot lid/tailgate = % To unlock the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press the % button. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again Rthe anti-theft system is primed again X To lock centrally: press the & button. You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the key with you. You can combine the KEYLESS-GO functions with the functions of a conventional key. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the key. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 1 m. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key determines whether a valid key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile the vehicle is in motion The key centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors boot lid/tailgate Rthe fuel filler flap When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 255). Rthe Z Opening and closing Do not keep the key: 83 Key 84 To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. For further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 97). X To unlock the boot lid/tailgate: pull the handle on the boot lid/tailgate. The vehicle only unlocks the boot lid/tailgate. Opening and closing X The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the frontpassenger door or the rear door. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. X X Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel alone. X To change the setting: simultaneously press the % and & buttons on the key for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 85). i If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle The key now functions as follows: To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 85). Emergency key element General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door or the boot lid/tailgate, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 78). There are several ways to deactivate the alarm: X To deactivate the alarm with the key: press the % or & button on the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESSGO: press the Start/Stop button in the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle. or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The key must be outside the vehicle. Key X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the key into the ignition lock. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Removing the emergency key element X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time, remove emergency key element ; from the key. For further information about: Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 90) the boot (Y page 95) Runlocking the tailgate (Y page 95) Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 90) Runlocking Opening and closing If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Checking the battery Inserting the emergency key element X Push emergency key element ; completely into the key until it engages and release catch : is back in its basic position. Battery of the key Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. 85 Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Replace the battery (Y page 86). X Z Key 86 i If the battery of the key is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle Opening and closing i You can obtain a battery from any qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 85). X Press emergency key element ; into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. When doing so, do not hold battery compartment cover : shut. X Remove battery compartment cover :. X Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contamination. X X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing and then press to close it. Insert emergency key element ; into the key. X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. X Key 87 Problems with the key Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If this does not work: X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using the emergency key element. The key is faulty. Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X You can no longer lock The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. or unlock the vehicle X Check the key battery (Y page 85) and replace it if necessary using KEYLESS-GO. (Y page 86). If this does not work: X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using the emergency key element. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. X Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You have lost a key. Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X X You have lost the emergency key element. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X Z Opening and closing You can no longer lock The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. or unlock the vehicle X Check the key battery (Y page 85) and replace it if necessary using the key. (Y page 86). Opening and closing 88 Doors Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be started using the key. X The on-board voltage is too low. Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 353). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 355). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked. started using KEYLESS- X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. GO. The key is in the vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock. Doors Important safety notes United Kingdom only: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the double-lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double-lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 79). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is trig- gered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 78). All countries: G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per- sons or road users Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. Doors If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. Stow luggage or loads preferably in the boot/ luggage compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300). X Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. Unlocking and opening the doors from the inside For all countries except the United Kingdom: you can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 78). United Kingdom only: if the vehicle has been locked with the key from the outside, the double-lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double-lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 79). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 78). For all countries: you can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 69). X X To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks. This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO. For all countries except the United Kingdom: you can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. United Kingdom only: you can only open a door from inside the vehicle if the double lock function has been deactivated. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 79). For all countries: you can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 69). Z Opening and closing G WARNING 89 Doors 90 If the vehicle has been locked using the locking button for the central locking, or has been locked automatically, and a door is opened from the inside: Opening and closing Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked Ronly the door which has been opened form the inside is unlocked if only the driver's door had been previously unlocked Unlocking the driver's door (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 85). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Automatic locking feature Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise to position 1. The door is unlocked. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element clockwise. X To deactivate: press and hold button : for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. X i If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer. You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 255). Rthe Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door, the antitheft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 78). Locking the vehicle (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the key, use the emergency key element. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the boot lid/tailgate. X Press the locking button (Y page 89). X Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors Boot/luggage compartment G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. ! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the boot lid/tailgate. i Boot lid/tailgate opening dimensions (Y page 407). Turn the emergency key element clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the boot lid/ tailgate are locked. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X Boot/luggage compartment Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid/tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid/tailgate. Never drive with the boot lid/tailgate open. Stow luggage or loads preferably in the boot/ luggage compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300). Do not leave the key in the boot/luggage compartment. You could otherwise lock yourself out. Vehicles without the boot lid remote closing feature: the boot lid can be: Ropened and closed manually from outside automatically from outside Ropened automatically from inside Runlocked with the emergency key element Vehicles with the boot lid remote closing feature: the boot lid can be: Ropened Ropened Ropened outside and closed manually from outside and closed automatically from the Ropened and closed automatically from the inside Runlocked with the emergency key element CLS Shooting Brake: you can: Ropen and close the tailgate manually from outside Ropen and close the tailgate automatically from outside Ropen and close the tailgate automatically from inside Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate Runlock the tailgate using the emergency key element Z Opening and closing are still visible. Press down the locking knobs by hand, if necessary. X Close the driver's door. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 85). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. 91 92 Boot/luggage compartment Opening and closing Boot lid/tailgate reversing function The boot lid/tailgate is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. It reacts if a solid object obstructs or restricts the boot lid/tailgate during the closing procedure. The boot lid/tailgate opens again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness to the boot lid/tailgate while it is closing. Press the % button on the key. CLS Coupé: pull handle :. X Raise the boot lid. X X CLS Shooting Brake: if you pull handle : and keep it in this position, you can open the tailgate manually. If you release the handle, the tailgate opens automatically. Closing G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 8 mm of the closing path This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone is trapped: Rpress the F button on the key, or Rpress the remote operating switch on the driver's door, or Rpress the closing or locking button on the boot lid/tailgate, or Rpull the handle on the boot lid/tailgate Opening/closing from the outside Opening Recess (example: CLS Coupé) Pull the boot lid/tailgate down using recess :. X CLS Shooting Brake: let the tailgate drop into the lock. X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the key (Y page 83) or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 83). X i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the boot/luggage compartment, the boot lid/ tailgate will not lock. The boot lid/tailgate then opens again. Opening/closing automatically from the outside Important safety notes United Kingdom only: Example: CLS Coupé, handle G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get Boot/luggage compartment If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the double-lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double-lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 79). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 78). All countries: Opening You can open the boot lid/tailgate automatically with the key or the handle in the boot lid/tailgate. X Press and hold the F button on the key until the boot lid/tailgate opens. or X If the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle of the boot lid/tailgate and release it again immediately (Y page 92). Closing G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the boot lid or tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: RPress the F button on the key. the remote operating switch on the driver's door. RPress the closing or locking button on the boot lid/tailgate. RPull the handle on the boot lid/tailgate. RPress ! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the boot lid/tailgate. i Boot lid/tailgate opening dimensions (Y page 407). Closing button and locking button (example: CLS Coupé) X To close: press closing button : in the boot lid/tailgate. CLS Coupé with boot lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO: you can simultaneously close the boot lid and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. X Press locking button ; in the boot lid. If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks. CLS Shooting Brake: you can simultaneously close the tailgate and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. X Press locking button ; on the tailgate. If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks. i If KEYLESS-GO detects a key in the boot/ luggage compartment, the boot lid/tailgate opens again after it is closed. Z Opening and closing out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. 93 94 Boot/luggage compartment If KEYLESS-GO detects a second key outside the vehicle, the boot lid/tailgate remains closed. Opening and closing Opening and closing Opening/closing automatically from the inside Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the boot lid or tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: RPress the F button on the key. the remote operating switch on the driver's door. RPress the closing or locking button on the boot lid/tailgate. RPull the handle on the boot lid/tailgate. RPress ! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the boot lid/tailgate. i Boot lid/tailgate opening dimensions (Y page 407). To open: pull remote operating switch for boot lid/tailgate : until the boot lid/tailgate opens. X To close (CLS Coupé): press remote operating switch for boot lid : until the boot lid is completely closed. X To close (CLS Shooting Brake): turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press remote operating switch for tailgate : until the tailgate is completely closed. You will hear a warning tone during the closing process. X You can open and close the boot lid/tailgate from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate (CLS Shooting Brake) Important safety notes ! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to open the tailgate fully when setting the opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle outside. Activating You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate. This is possible in the top half of its opening range, up to approximately 20 cm before the stop. Boot/luggage compartment Deactivating X Press and hold the closing button (Y page 92) in the tailgate until you hear two short tones. Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise from position 1 as far as it will go to position 2. The boot is unlocked. X Turn the emergency key element back to position 1 and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. X i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 90), the boot is also locked. Tailgate emergency release (CLS Shooting Brake) General notes ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the Unlocking the boot (CLS Coupé) rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. ! The boot lid swings upwards when i Opening dimensions of the boot lid/tail- opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. If the boot cannot be unlocked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 78). X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 85). X Insert the emergency key element into the boot lid lock as far as the stop. gate (Y page 407). If the tailgate can no longer be opened from outside the vehicle, use the emergency release on the inside of the tailgate. Opening Remove luggage compartment cover (Y page 307). X Fold rear seat backrest forwards (Y page 304). X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 84). X Z Opening and closing To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the tailgate. X To stop the opening procedure at the desired position: press the closing button (Y page 92) in the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again. X To store the position: press and hold the closing button in the tailgate until you hear a short tone. The opening angle limiter is activated. The tailgate then stops in the stored position when opened. X 95 Side windows 96 Insert emergency key element ; into the opening in trim :. X Turn emergency key element ; 90° clockwise. X Push emergency key element ; in the direction of the arrow and open the tailgate. X Insert the emergency key element into the key. Opening and closing X i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 90), the luggage compartment is also locked. Side window reversing feature The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window during the closing process, the side window opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is however only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing a side window. G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. gers Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement Rduring resetting closing the side window again manually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Rwhen Opening and closing the side windows The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. Side windows 97 Convenience opening feature General notes Runlock the vehicle the side windows Ropen the sliding sunroof Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat Ropen : ; = ? Front left Front right Rear right Rear left Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding switch. X To open fully: press the corresponding switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To close manually: pull the corresponding switch and hold it. X To close fully: pull the corresponding switch beyond the pressure point. Automatic operation is started. X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again. i If you press/pull the switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/ pulling again. i The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the key. The key must be in close proximity to the vehicle. X i You can continue to operate the side windows after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. i The side windows cannot be operated from the rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 69). Convenience opening feature Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are in the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. X Convenience closing feature Important safety notes G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. Proceed as follows if someone is trapped: With the key: X X Release the & button. Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof open again. Z Opening and closing You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, the key is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Side windows 98 With KEYLESS-GO: Release the sensor surface on the door handle. X Pull the door handle immediately and hold it. The side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding sunroof open. Opening and closing X General notes Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed. X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: Rclose Rclose the side windows the sliding sunroof Using the key Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip of the key at the door handle on the driver's door. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the key must be in close proximity to the vehicle. X Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed. X X To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. Using KEYLESS-GO The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the vehicle. All the doors must be closed. Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all doors. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed. (Y page 96) X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 96). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. X Sliding sunroof 99 Problems with the side windows If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. Remove the objects. X Close the side window. X A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again be closed and you can- slightly: not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Sliding sunroof Important safety notes G WARNING While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, press the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. ! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Z Opening and closing G WARNING 100 Sliding sunroof Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. Operating the sliding sunroof Opening and closing Opening and closing i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. To reduce or eliminate these noises: Rchange the position of the sliding sunroof Ropen a side window the sliding sunroof to the comfort setting Ropen Sliding sunroof reversing feature The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is however only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing the sliding roof. G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone is trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately or automatic operation, press the switch briefly in any direction The closing process is stopped. Rduring Overhead control panel : To raise ; To open = To close/lower Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the corresponding direction. When opening, the sliding sunroof first automatically moves to comfort setting. If you press it again, the sliding sunroof opens completely. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling again. X The sun protection cover automatically opens along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or close the sun protection cover manually when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed. i You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. Sliding sunroof 101 Rain-closing feature When the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain. extreme outside temperatures. Rafter six hours. Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply. The rear of the sliding sunroof is then raised in order to ventilate the vehicle interior. Opening and closing Rat i If the sliding sunroof is obstructed when being closed by the rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly. The rain-closing feature is then deactivated. The sliding sunroof does not close if: Rit is raised at the rear. is blocked. Rno rain is falling on the area of the windscreen being monitored by the rain sensor. If the vehicle, for example, is under a bridge or in a carport, the field of the sensor may be covered. Rit Resetting ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not operate smoothly. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear (Y page 100). X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another second. X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully opened and closed again (Y page 100). X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Z 102 Sliding sunroof Problems with the sliding sunroof Opening and closing G WARNING If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone is trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately or the switch in any direction during the automatic opening/closing process The closing process is stopped. Rpress Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The sliding sunroof can- If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens not be closed and you again slightly: cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. 103 Useful information ............................ 104 Correct driver's seat position .......... 104 Seats .................................................. 105 Steering wheel .................................. 113 Mirrors ............................................... 116 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Memory function .............................. 119 104 Correct driver's seat position Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Seats, steering wheel and mirrors els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 26). Correct driver's seat position G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 105). X Make sure that seat = is correctly adjusted. Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 106) When adjusting the seat, make sure that: X Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible are sitting in a normal upright position Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position Ryou have set the seat angle so that your thighs are gently supported Ryou can depress the pedals properly X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted correctly. When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint. X Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 113). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted correctly. Adjust the steering wheel manually (Y page 113) Adjust the steering wheel electrically (Y page 114) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 44). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 46). Seats Rfit snugly across your body Rbe routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed across your hips in the pelvic area X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors so that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions (Y page 116). X Vehicles with a memory function: save the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings with the memory function (Y page 119). Seats Important safety notes G WARNING If children adjust the seats, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjust- ment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. G WARNING When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle occupant could become trapped by the guide rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat when adjusting it. G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example. Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The seat belt should: 105 106 Seats ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rdo Seats, steering wheel and mirrors not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care". Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. Adjusting the seats ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. i The head restraints in the front seats are fitted with the NECK-PRO system (Y page 53). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. i Further related subjects: RThrough-loading facility in the rear bench seat (Y page 305) RThrough-loading facility in the rear bench seat (Y page 303) : ; = ? A Head restraint height Seat cushion angle Seat height Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Backrest angle i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE- SAFE® is triggered and the front-passenger seat was previously in an unfavourable position, it will be moved to a better position. i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 119). i Vehicles with the through-loading feature and memory function: if you fold down a rear seat backrest, the respective front seat is moved forwards slightly if necessary. i Vehicles with memory function: when the seat is moved forwards or backwards, the headrest is moved up or down automatically. Seats Adjusting the head restraints Important safety notes 107 Adjusting the head restraints manually Adjusting the head restraint height G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example. Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off. To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down to the desired position. X Adjusting the angle of the head restraints General notes Observe the important safety notes regarding the seats (Y page 105). Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to the correct position. X Push or pull the lower edge of the head restraint in the direction of the arrow. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Radjust Seats 108 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the head restraints electrically X To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for head restraint adjustment : up or down in the direction of the arrow. Adjusting the luxury head restraints Rear seat head restraints Lowering the rear seat head restraints from the front Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Press button :. X Adjusting the rear seat head restraint angle To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right or left-hand side bolster : into the desired position. X To adjust the angle of the head restraint: push or pull the head restraint in the direction of arrow ;. i Adjust the head restraint so that the back of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible. X CLS Coupé X Pull or push the top of the head restraint until it is in the desired position. CLS Shooting Brake Seats 109 Pull or push the bottom of the head restraint until it has reached the desired position. i The tilt angle can only be adjusted on the two outer head restraints. The centre head restraint is only height-adjustable. X G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example. Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off. ! Make sure that the rear window roller sunblind is retracted when removing the rear head restraints. Otherwise, you could damage the roller sunblind. CLS Shooting Brake i Before the head restraints can be removed, the rear seat must be tilted forwards. To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X Press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To refit: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. X Adjusting the multicontour seat CLS Coupé i The head restraints can only be removed if the rear seat folds forward. To remove: press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To refit: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. X : To adjust the thigh cushion ; To adjust the backrest contour in the lum- bar region = To adjust the backrest contour in the upper back region ? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat backrest Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Removing and fitting the rear seat head restraints 110 Seats You can adjust the contour of the front seats individually so as to provide optimum support for your back and sides. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the active multicontour seat Overview : To adjust the seat cushion length ; To switch the dynamic function on or off = To adjust the side bolsters of the seat backrest ? To switch the massage function on or off A To adjust the contour of the backrest to increase/decrease support B To adjust the height/depth of the backrest contour The active multicontour seat automatically adapts the sides of the backrest to your current driving style. Dynamic function The dynamic function adjusts the air cushions in the side bolsters of the seat backrests to ensure ideal lateral support at all times. You can choose between two levels. To switch on: press button ; once or twice until the desired level is set. One or two indicator lamps in button ; light up. X To switch off: press button ; repeatedly until all indicator lamps in button ; go out. X You can select the following levels: Level 1 (one indicator lamp) Standard setting: slightly increased lateral support and slow build-up of air pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest. Level 2 (two indicator lamps) Sport setting: increased lateral support and fast build-up of pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest. Massage function (PULSE) The massage function helps you to prevent muscle tension on long journeys. You can choose between two levels. X To switch on: press button ? once or twice until the desired level is set. One or two indicator lamps in button ? light up. The air cushions in the lumbar region vibrate for approximately 20 minutes. Seats Adjusting the lumbar support 111 Switching the seat heating on/off You can adjust the contour of the driver's seat so as to provide optimum support for your back. X Move adjustment lever : in the direction of the arrow until the desired backrest contour is achieved. G WARNING If you repeatedly switch on seat heating, the seat cushion and backrest padding may become very hot. The health of vehicle occupants with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch on the seat heating repeatedly. Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Driver's and front-passenger seat : ; = ? To raise the backrest contour To soften the backrest contour To lower the backrest contour To harden the backrest contour You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. X i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Switching on/off 112 Seats Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Problems with the seat heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch back on automatically. Switching the seat ventilation on/off Switching on/off Driver's and front-passenger seat The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 97). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level. Steering wheel 113 Problems with the seat ventilation Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Steering wheel Important safety notes Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The seat ventilation has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical conswitched off premasumers are switched on. turely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as switched on. the rear window heating or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation will switch back on automatically. Adjusting the steering wheel manually G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING Children could become trapped by the steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. : Release lever ; To adjust the steering wheel height = To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. X Z Steering wheel 114 Adjusting the steering wheel electrically Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off the ignition and open the driver's door, the steering wheel heating is switched off. i The steering wheel heating does not Seats, steering wheel and mirrors switch off automatically. : To adjust the steering wheel height ; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 115) RStoring settings (Y page 119) Steering wheel heating Switching on/off Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow : or ;. Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you remove the key from the ignition lock, the steering wheel heating is switched off. Steering wheel 115 Problems with the steering wheel heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Important safety notes G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. If someone is trapped: Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving. The adjustment process is stopped. G WARNING If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer (Y page 257). Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active The steering wheel tilts upwards if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock the key: open the driver's door; the key must be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). Rwith i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper stop. Position of the steering wheel for driving The steering wheel is moved to the previously set position if: Rthe driver's door is closed and the key: you insert the key into the ignition lock If you close the driver's door with the key inserted in the ignition lock, the steering wheel is automatically moved to the previously set position. The last position of the steering wheel is stored when you switch off the ignition or Rwith Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The steering wheel The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical conheating has switched sumers are switched on. itself off prematurely or X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as cannot be switched on. the rear window heating or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel heating will switch back on automatically. Mirrors 116 when you store the setting with the memory function (Y page 119). Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the key in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 257). Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in the mirrors are closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from road users driving behind you when changing lanes, for instance. There is a risk of an accident. You should therefore always look over your shoulder to determine the actual distance from road users driving behind you. Mirrors Rear-view mirror Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Press button : for the left-hand exterior mirror or button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button = up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions. X X Anti-dazzle mode: pivot anti-dazzle switch : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the Mirrors i The exterior mirrors can also be heated manually by switching on the rear window heating. Folding the exterior mirrors in/out electrically Folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 257): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out. Exterior mirror pushed out of position Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate. X i If you are driving faster than 47 km/h, you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors. Resetting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 257). X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Briefly press button :. If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position (forwards or backwards), proceed as follows: Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button : until you hear a click and the mirror engages audibly into position (Y page 117). The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 116). X Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antidazzle mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously: Rthe ignition is switched on and light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror The mirrors do not dip if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Rincident Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors rear window heating is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Heating takes a maximum of ten minutes. 117 118 Mirrors Parking position of the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Using the memory button Setting and storing the parking position Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Using reverse gear : Button for the exterior mirror on the driv- : Button for the exterior mirror on the driv- er's side ; Button for the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side = Adjustment button ? Memory button M You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. X Stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. er's side ; Button for the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side = Adjustment button ? Memory button M You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M ?. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X With the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side activated, use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror. The rear wheel and the kerb should be visible in the exterior mirror. X Press memory button M ? and one of the arrows on adjustment button = within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. X If the exterior mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. X Memory function : Button for the exterior mirror on the driv- er's side ; Button for the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side = Adjustment button ? Memory button M Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side using button ;. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: X soon as you exceed a speed of 15 km/h Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side G WARNING If children activate the memory function, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint Ractive multicontour seat: seat contour, dynamic function level Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Ras Memory function Storing settings G WARNING If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, the adjustments could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side while the vehicle is stationary. Adjust the seat (Y page 106). On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 114) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 116). X Press memory button M and then press storage position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X X Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Calling up a stored parking position setting 119 Memory function 120 Calling up a stored setting Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3, until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X 121 Useful information ............................ 122 Exterior lighting ................................ 122 Interior lighting ................................. 130 Replacing bulbs ................................. 131 Lights and windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers ........................... 133 122 Exterior lighting Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Lights and windscreen wipers ist workshops: (Y page 26). Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. Therefore, your vehicle is equipped with special daytime driving lamps. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. If the headlamps are converted to symmetrical dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and "extended range foglamps" functions (Intelligent Light System) are not available. Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set by: Rusing the light switch the combination switch (Y page 125) Rusing the on-board computer (Y page 253) Rusing Light switch Operation Driving abroad Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps If your journey takes you to countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which the vehicle is registered, your headlamps must be switched to symmetrical dipped beam. This prevents oncoming traffic from being dazzled. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as large an area of the edge of the carriageway. Convert the headlamps as close to the border as possible before driving in these countries (Y page 253). Asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps Convert the headlamps back to asymmetrical dipped beam as soon as possible after crossing the border (Y page 253). 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- lamps B R Rear foglamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to Ã. Exterior lighting Rremove the key from the ignition lock the driver's door with the key in position 0 Ropen Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle lighting at all times. à is the preferred light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): RKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the side lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RWith the engine running: if you have switched on the daytime driving lights function in the on-board computer, the daytime driving lights or the side lamps and dippedbeam headlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã. The daytime driving lights improve the detectability of your vehicle during the day. Here, the daytime driving lights function must be switched on via the on-board computer (Y page 253). When the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the green T (side lamps) and L (dipped-beam headlamps) indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. Dipped-beam headlamps G WARNING 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- lamps When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. B R Rear foglamp Z Lights and windscreen wipers The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/ parking lamps) switches off automatically if you: 123 124 Exterior lighting Lights and windscreen wipers Rear foglamp 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps B R Rear foglamp When the ignition is switched on and the light switch is in position L, the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on even if the light sensor does not sense dark ambient light conditions. This is advantageous when there is fog or rain. X To switch on the dipped-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- lamps B R Rear foglamp The rear foglamp improves the visibility of your vehicle in heavy fog for the following traffic. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear foglamps. X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Side lamps ! If the battery has been excessively discharged, the side lamps or parking lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the T side lamps for several Exterior lighting hours. If possible, switch on the X right or the W left parking lamp. 125 5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- lamps 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps B R Rear foglamp X Switching on the parking lamps ensures that the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the parking lamps: the key is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle). Combination switch Turn signals To switch on: turn the light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Parking lamps : ; = ? Main-beam headlamps Turn signal, right Headlamp flasher Turn signal, left To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. X 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor Z Lights and windscreen wipers B R Rear foglamp Exterior lighting 126 Lights and windscreen wipers Main-beam headlamps : ; = ? Main-beam headlamps Turn signal, right Headlamp flasher Turn signal, left To switch on the main-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the à position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the main-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it controls activation of the main-beam headlamps (Y page 128). X Headlamp flasher : ; = ? Main-beam headlamps Turn signal, right Headlamp flasher Turn signal, left To switch on: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. X Hazard warning lamps To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. X Exterior lighting The hazard warning lamps switch on automatically if: 127 Active light function Ran airbag is deployed or vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 70 km/h and comes to a standstill The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 10 km/h again after a full brake application. Rthe operate even if the ignition is switched off. Headlamp cleaning system The headlamps are cleaned automatically if the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is operated five times (Y page 133) while the lights are on and the engine is running. When you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0. The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. In this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while driving. This allows you to recognise pedestrians, cyclists and animals. Active: when the lights are switched on. Cornering light function Intelligent Light System General notes The Intelligent Light System is a system that adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit the prevailing driving and weather conditions. It offers advanced functions for improved illumination of the road surface, e.g. depending on the vehicle speed or weather conditions. The system includes the active light function, cornering light function, motorway mode and extended range foglamps. The system is only active when it is dark. You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent Light System" using the on-board computer (Y page 253). The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and turn the steering wheel Z Lights and windscreen wipers i The hazard warning lamps continue to 128 Exterior lighting Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 70 km/h or switch off the turn signal or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Not active: if, following activation, you are driving at speeds above 100 km/h or if you switch off the rear foglamp. Adaptive Highbeam Assist General notes Lights and windscreen wipers Motorway mode Active: if you are driving at a speed above 110 km/h and do not make any large steering movements for at least 1,000 m or if you are driving at a speed above 130 km/h. Not active: if you are driving at speeds below 80 km/h following activation. Extended range foglamps The extended range foglamps reduce the glare experienced by the driver and improve the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. Active: if you are driving at speeds below 70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp. You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between dipped beam and main beam automatically. The system recognises vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or travelling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from main beam to dipped beam. The system automatically adapts the dippedbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it switches on the main-beam headlamps again. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Exterior lighting G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognise road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist recognises road users too late or not at all. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the main-beam headlamps in good time. Rwho Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow on the sensors or if the sensors are obscured Rdirt Activating Adaptive Highbeam Assist = Headlamp flasher ? Turn signal, left To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor activates the dipped-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 45 km/h: The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 55 km/h and no other road users are detected: The main-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below 45 km/h or other road users are detected or the roads are adequately lit: The main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X X Headlamps misted up on the inside Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp. : Main-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right Z Lights and windscreen wipers Important safety notes 129 130 Interior lighting Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Interior lighting control General notes Lights and windscreen wipers In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except for when the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The colour and brightness of the ambient lighting may be set using the on-board computer (Y page 253). Automatic interior lighting control Front overhead control panel : u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off ; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off = p Switches the right-hand front read- ing lamp on/off ? c Switches the front interior lighting on/off A p Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on/off Front overhead control panel : u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off ; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off = p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off ? c Switches the front interior lighting on/off A p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off Rear-compartment overhead control panel : p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off ; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off X To switch on/off: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle a door Rremove the key from the ignition lock Ropen Replacing bulbs The interior lighting is activated for a short time when the key is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (Y page 254). 131 Crash-responsive emergency lighting The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X Manual interior lighting control To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button. or Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the key. Replacing bulbs Important safety notes Front overhead control panel : u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off ; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off = p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off ? c Switches the front interior lighting on/off A p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off To switch the front interior lighting on/ off: press the c button. X To switch the rear interior lighting on/ off: press the u button. X To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button. X G DANGER Xenon bulbs are under high voltage. You can get an electric shock if you remove the cover of the xenon bulb and touch the electrical contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. Never touch the parts or the electrical contacts of the xenon bulb. Always have work on the xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If your vehicle is equipped with xenon bulbs, you can recognise this by the following: the cone of light from the xenon bulbs moves from the top to the bottom and back again when you start the engine. For this to be observed, the lights must be switched on before the engine is started. G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can become very hot during use. When replacing a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before replacing the bulb. Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb may explode if: Ryou Rit touch it is hot Z Lights and windscreen wipers X 132 Replacing bulbs Ryou drop it scratch it Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designed for that purpose. Only fit spare bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth. Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. You can neither replace xenon bulbs nor LED bulbs. Have LED bulbs replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 132). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance replacing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Lights and windscreen wipers Ryou Tail lamps : Reversing lamp: W 16 W Replacing the rear bulbs Reversing lamp Lamp cluster Switch off the lights. Open the boot or luggage compartment. X Reach up into the side panelling and pull downwards until the lamp cluster is easily accessible. X Press the detent of connector ; and pull out connector ;. X Use a suitable tool to loosen and remove four nuts :. X Remove the entire lamp cluster. X Turn bulb holder = anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Pull out the bulb. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder =. X Insert bulb holder = into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X X Overview of bulb replacement – bulbs You can replace the following bulbs. The details for the bulb type can be found in the legend. Windscreen wipers 133 Reinsert the lamp cluster. Tighten four nuts :. X Push in connector ; until it engages. X Insert the side panelling. X X Windscreen wipers ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers when the windscreen is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windscreen can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windscreen is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windscreen wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate them using washer fluid. ! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on the windscreen after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, this may be due to wax or other residue. Clean the windscreen with washer fluid after an automatic car wash. ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windscreen becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. Combination switch 1 $ Windscreen wipers off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/î to wipe the wind- screen using washer fluid Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. X In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windscreen wipers to wipe more frequently. If the wiper blades are worn, the windscreen will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions. Z Lights and windscreen wipers Switching the windscreen wipers on/ off Windscreen wipers 134 Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen/ rear window. Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windscreen/rear window, the windscreen/rear window may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Lights and windscreen wipers Switching the rear window wiper on/ off Combination switch : è Switch 2 ô To wipe with washer fluid 3 I To switch on intermittent wiping Depending on the equipment level of your vehicle, there are two variants of wiper blade which are fitted and removed in different ways. Based on the diagrams, check which wiper blade is fitted to your vehicle. 4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping 5 ô To wipe with washer fluid Replacing the wiper blades (version 1) Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn switch : on the combination switch to the corresponding position. When the rear window wiper is switched on, the icon appears in the instrument cluster. X Removing the wiper blades X Remove the key from the ignition lock or turn the key to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO). X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen. X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. ! Never open the bonnet/tailgate if a wiper arm is folded away from the windscreen/ rear window. X Remove the wiper blade from the retaining pin on the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow. Fitting the wiper blades X Push the new wiper blade onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow. Windscreen wipers Make sure that the wiper blade slides fully onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm. X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper arm. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. 135 Replacing the rear window wiper blade Removing the wiper blade Replacing the wiper blades (version 2) Removing the wiper blades Remove the key from the ignition lock or turn the key to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO). X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen. Remove the key from the ignition lock. Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window. X Press both release clips ;. X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow = away from wiper arm ?. X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of arrow A. X X Fitting a wiper blade X Firmly press release knob : and pull the wiper blade upwards from the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow. Fitting the wiper blades X Position the new wiper blade in the retainer on the wiper arm and slide it into place in the opposite direction to the arrow. The wiper blade audibly engages. X Make sure that wiper blade is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. Position new wiper blade : with recess B on lug A. X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining clips ; engage in bracket ?. X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. X Z Lights and windscreen wipers X 136 Windscreen wipers Problems with the windscreen wipers Lights and windscreen wipers Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windscreen wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. The windscreen wipers The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 137 Useful information ............................ 138 Overview of climate control systems ................................................... 138 Operating the climate control system ..................................................... 142 Climate control Adjusting the air vents ..................... 154 138 Overview of climate control systems Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all models, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified special- Climate control ist workshops: (Y page 26). Overview of climate control systems Important safety notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise mist up. To prevent the windows from misting up: Rswitch Rswitch briefly off climate control only briefly on air-recirculation mode only Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the "demist windscreen" function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air. Climate control is only operational when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved when the side windows and the roof are closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 149). i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 97). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most par- ticles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odours. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As this depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. Overview of climate control systems 139 : ; = ? A B C D E F G H To set the temperature, left (Y page 145) To demist the windscreen (Y page 146) To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 146) To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 143) To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 147) To set the temperature, right (Y page 145) To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 148) To set the air distribution (Y page 145) To increase the airflow (Y page 146) To reduce the airflow (Y page 146) To switch climate control on/off (Y page 142) To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 144) Information about using THERMATIC automatic climate control Automatic climate control The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of THERMATIC automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above the à and ¿ buttons light up. RSet the temperature to 22 †. ROnly use the "Windscreen demisting" function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp above the á button goes out. RVehicles with COMAND Online: if you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at the bot- Climate control Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone) 140 Overview of climate control systems tom of the screen in the COMAND display. See also the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. ECO start/stop function Climate control During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 164). Overview of climate control systems 141 : ; = ? A B C D E F G H I J Front control panel To set the temperature, left (Y page 145) To demist the windscreen (Y page 146) To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 149) To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 143) To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 147) To set the temperature, right (Y page 145) To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 146) To switch climate control on/off (Y page 142) To set the air distribution (Y page 145) To increase the airflow (Y page 146) To reduce the airflow (Y page 146) To set the climate mode (Y page 144) To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 148) To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 144) K L M N O Rear control panel To increase the airflow (Y page 146) To reduce the airflow (Y page 146) Display To reduce the temperature (Y page 145) To increase the temperature (Y page 145) Climate control Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (3-zone) 142 Operating the climate control system Information about using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Climate control Automatic climate control The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above the à and ¿ buttons light up. RIn automatic mode, you can also use the ñ button to adjust airflow (FOCUS/ MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is recommended. RSet the temperature to 22 †. ROnly use the "Windscreen demisting" function briefly until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment as well. The indicator lamp above the á button goes out. RUse the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. RVehicles with COMAND Online: if you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the COMAND display. See also the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 164). Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could mist up. Therefore, only switch off climate control briefly. i Activate climate control primarily using the à button (Y page 144). Switching on/off Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X To switch on: press the à button on the control panel for the climate control. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. X To switch off: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up. X Operating the climate control system 143 Activating/deactivating the cooling with air dehumidification function If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, only switch off cooling with air dehumidification for a short period. The cooling with air dehumidification function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. Activating/deactivating To activate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. i In vehicles with auxiliary heating, one of the indicator lamps on the auxiliary heating button lights up when the "cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. X X To deactivate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature. Climate control General notes Operating the climate control system 144 Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a the ¿ button malfunction. flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. remains off. The cooling with air dehumidification system cannot be switched on. Climate control Setting climate control to automatic mode General notes X To switch to manual mode: press the _ button. or X Press the I or K button. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. If desired, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, only switch off cooling with air dehumidification for a short period. The "Set climate mode" function is only available with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. In automatic mode you can select the following climate modes: Activating/switching X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. i THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: when automatic mode is activated, you can set the climate mode (Y page 144). X Setting the climate mode FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly cooler MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly warmer and with less of a draught Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Press the à button. X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the desired climate mode appears in the display. Operating the climate control system THERMATIC automatic climate control Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X To increase/reduce: turn temperature control : or B clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 139). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Turn temperature control : clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 141). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the rear compartment and the front-passenger side. X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the rear control panel: press the r or s button on the rear control panel. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control zones You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X To increase/reduce the temperature in the front compartment: turn temperature control : or B clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 141). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the front control panel: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. X P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents S Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents ¯ Directs the airflow through the demister vents b Directs the airflow through the demister, centre and side air vents (only for certain countries) a Directs the airflow through the footwell and demister vents _ Directs the airflow through the demister vents, the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed when the controls on the side air vents are turned downwards. Climate control Setting the temperature 145 Operating the climate control system 146 Setting the air distribution Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Press the _ button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. X Setting the airflow Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X To increase: press the K button. X To reduce: press the I button. Climate control X i You can use THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control to set the airflow in the rear compartment separately. If the battery is not charged sufficiently, the blower output may be reduced. Once the battery is sufficiently charged again, full blower output will be available. Switching the ZONE function on/off To switch on: press the á button. The indicator lamp above the á button lights up. THERMATIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment. X To switch off: press the á button. The indicator lamp above the á button goes out. THERMATIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment. X Demisting the windscreen You can use this function to defrost the windscreen or to demist the inside of the windscreen and the side windows. Switch off the windscreen demisting function as soon as the windscreen is clear again. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X To activate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up. The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rhigh airflow temperature Rair distribution to the windscreen and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off Rhigh If the battery is not charged sufficiently, the blower output may be reduced. Once the battery is sufficiently charged again, full blower output will be available again. X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or X Press the à button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X THERMATIC automatic climate control: turn temperature controls : or B clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 139). THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: turn temperature controls : or B clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 141). or X Press the K or I button. Operating the climate control system 147 Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidification function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X Adjust the side air vents so that the heated air is directed towards the side windows. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the "Windscreen demisting" function ¬. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. X Press the _ button repeatedly until the P or O symbol appears in the display. X Adjust the side air vents so that no air is directed towards the side windows. X Rear window heating General notes The rear window heating has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear. It otherwise switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off. Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. X Climate control Windows misted up on the outside Operating the climate control system 148 Problems with the rear window heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be activated. The battery has not been sufficiently charged. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating can be activated again. g button does not light up. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode Climate control General notes You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can mist up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows misting up. The operation of air-recirculation mode is the same for all control panels. Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X To activate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. i THERMATIC automatic climate control: air-recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside temperatures. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: air-recirculation mode is automatically activated at high levels of pollution or at high outside temperatures. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp above the X To deactivate: press the g button. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. i Air-recirculation mode is deactivated automatically: X Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 5† Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 5 † if the cooling with air dehumidification function is activated Convenience opening/closing using the air-recirculation button G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. G WARNING During convenience opening parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped Operating the climate control system X Convenience closing feature: press and hold the g button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed. The indicator lamp in the g button lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. If parts of the body are in the closing area during convenience closing, proceed as follows: Press the W button for opening/closing the side windows. The side windows stop. X To then open the side windows, press the W button again. X Press the 3 button to open/close the sliding sunroof. The sliding sunroof stops. X To then open the sliding sunroof, pull back on the 3 button. i Notes on the automatic reversing feature for: X Rthe side windows (Y page 96) Rthe sliding sunroof (Y page 100) X Convenience opening feature: press and hold the g button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof have opened. The side windows and the sliding sunroof move back to their original position. The indicator lamp in the g button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. Activating/deactivating the residual heat function General notes The residual heat function is only available with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the temperature that has been set for the vehicle interior. Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it (Y page 159). X To activate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights up. i If the residual heat function is activated, the windows may mist up on the inside. X i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. i If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. X To deactivate: press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes out. Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Rwhen the auxiliary heating is switched on Rwhen i If you open the side windows or the sliding sunroof manually after closing with the convenience closing feature, they will remain in this position when opened using the convenience opening feature. Z Climate control between the side window and window frame. There is a risk of injury. When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. If someone becomes trapped, press the W switch immediately to open/close the side window in the door. The side window stops. To continue closing the side window, pull on the W switch. 149 150 Operating the climate control system maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. Auxiliary heating Important safety notes Climate control G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust fumes can enter the vehicle, especially carbon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. in enclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck in snow. There is a risk of fatal injuries. You should switch off the auxiliary heating in enclosed spaces which do not have an extraction system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliary heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and the area around the vehicle clear of snow. To guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle away from the wind. G WARNING When the auxiliary heating is switched on, parts of the vehicle can become very hot. Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with: i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about ten minutes. The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehicle interior to the set temperature. This occurs without using the heat of the running engine. The auxiliary heating is operated directly using the vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the tank content must be at least at reserve fuel level to ensure that the auxiliary heating functions. The auxiliary heating/ventilation automatically adjusts to changes in temperature and weather conditions. For this reason, the auxiliary heating could switch from ventilation mode to heating mode or from heating mode to ventilation mode. The auxiliary heating switches off automatically after 50 minutes. This time limit can be altered. To do this, visit a qualified specialist workshop. You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Rhot Before switching on Rthe Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Set the desired temperature. parts of the exhaust system exhaust gas itself There is a risk of fire. When the auxiliary heating is switched on, make sure that: Rno flammable materials come into contact with hot vehicle components Rthe exhaust gas can escape from the exhaust pipe unhindered Rthe exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials. The auxiliary heating and the exhaust gas discharge location can be found in front of the right-hand front wheel. ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a X Auxiliary heating or ventilation can also be switched on if the manually set climate control is activated. Optimum comfort can be attained when the system is set to automatic mode. Set the temperature to 22 †. The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated or deactivated using the remote control or the button on the centre console. The on-board computer can be used to specify up to three departure times, one of which may be preselected (Y page 256). Operating the climate control system Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the centre console button The remote control has a maximum range of approximately 300 metres. This range is reduced by: The colours of the indicator lamps on the button have the following meanings: Rsources Blue Auxiliary ventilation switched on Red Auxiliary heating switched on Yellow Departure time preselected (Y page 256) 151 of radio interference objects between the remote control and the vehicle Rthe remote control being in an unfavourable position in relation to the vehicle Rtransmitting from an enclosed space Rsolid i The optimum range can be achieved if you i A battery symbol appears in the display when the battery in the remote control is low. Replace the remote control battery (Y page 152). Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off Switch in the centre console To switch auxiliary heating/ventilation on: press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : lights up. X To switch auxiliary heating/ventilation off: press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : goes out. X Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off using the remote control General notes Your vehicle comes with one remote control. You may use two additional remote controls for your vehicle. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Store the remote control for the auxiliary heating so that the auxiliary heating cannot be switched on unintentionally. In particular, ensure that the remote control for the auxiliary heating is kept out of the reach of children. Remote control : Display ; . Checks the status/sets the depar- ture time = ^ Switches off the auxiliary heating/ ventilation ? u Switches on the auxiliary heating/ ventilation A , Checks the status/sets the depar- ture time To activate: press the u button. ON is shown in the remote control display. X To switch off: press the ^ button. OFF is shown in the remote control display. X Z Climate control hold the remote control vertically, pointing upwards when you press one of the buttons. 152 Operating the climate control system Checking the status of the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press the , or . button. The following messages may appear in the display: Display Meaning Climate control The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is switched off. The auxiliary ventilation is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation. The auxiliary heating is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating. A departure time has been activated. The departure time appears in the display. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary ventilation is currently activated. The departure time appears in the display. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary heating is currently activated. The departure time appears in the display. Setting the departure time Make sure that the time set in the vehicle is correct before setting the departure time; see Digital Owner's Manual. Otherwise, the auxiliary heating may switch on at the wrong time and at an unsuitable location. When setting the departure time, also observe the important safety notes (Y page 150). X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears in the display. X Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The Î symbol in the remote control display flashes. X Press the , or . button to set the desired departure time. i The longer you press the , or . button, the faster the time changes. X Press the u and ^ buttons simultaneously. The new departure time is stored. Activating the set departure time X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the desired departure time appears in the display. X Press the u button. The Í symbol and the departure time appear in the display. Deactivating the set departure time Press the , or . button. The status of the auxiliary heating is shown in the display. X Press the . button. The first departure time stored appears in the display. X Press the ^ button. OFF is shown in the remote control display. X Replacing the remote control battery G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Operating the climate control system 153 Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Climate control Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. One 6 V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is required. X Prise apart the side arms of battery cover ; and pull off battery cover ;. X Remove old battery :. X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity signs on the back of the remote control when doing so. X Slide battery cover ; back onto the remote control. X Use the remote control to check the vehicle's auxiliary heating functions. Z 154 Adjusting the air vents Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions FAIL The starter battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is faulty. X Charge the starter battery. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. $ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off using the remote control. © There is not enough fuel in the fuel tank, i.e. the fuel tank is not filled to the reserve fuel level. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. Climate control FAIL FAIL The auxiliary heating is faulty. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: G WARNING Rkeep Adjusting the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. the air inlet between the windscreen and the bonnet free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the vents or ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior. Adjusting the air vents : ; = ? X Centre air vent, left Centre air vent, right Centre vent thumbwheel, right Centre vent thumbwheel, left To open/close: turn thumbwheels = and ? up or down. Adjusting the side air vents midification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove compartment could be damaged. : Air vent thumbwheel ; Air vent When automatic climate control is activated, the glove compartment can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings. X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : clockwise or anti-clockwise. Setting the rear-compartment air vents Adjusting the centre vents in the rear compartment : Demister vent ; Side air vent = Control for side air vent X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or down. Adjusting the glove compartment air vent ! Close the air vent when heating the vehi- cle. At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air dehu- Example: CLS Coupé : Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel ; Rear-compartment air vent, right Z Climate control Setting the centre air vents 155 Adjusting the air vents 156 = Rear control panel, only with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control ? Rear-compartment air vent, left Climate control X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or down. 157 Useful information ............................ 158 Running-in notes ............................... 158 Automatic transmission ................... 167 Refuelling ........................................... 177 Parking ............................................... 180 Driving tips ........................................ 182 Driving systems ................................ 186 Towing a trailer ................................. 232 Driving and parking Driving ............................................... 158 158 Driving Useful information Driving and parking i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 26). Running-in notes Important safety notes In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1500 km If you treat the engine with sufficient care from the very start, you will be rewarded with excellent performance for the remainder of the engine's life. RDrive at varying road speeds and engine speeds for the first 1500 km. RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this period, e.g. driving at full throttle. RChange gear in good time, before the rev counter needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the rev counter. RDo not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). After 1500 km, you may gradually accelerate the vehicle to full road and engine speeds. Additional running-in notes for AMG vehicles: RDo not drive at speeds above 140 km/h for the first 1500 km. allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4500 rpm briefly. ROnly i You should also observe these notes on running-in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. AMG vehicles with self-locking rear axle differential Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. Change the oil after a running-in period of 3000 km to improve protection of the rear axle differential. This oil change prolongs the service life of the differential. Have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. Driving Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. Rshoes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire Rlose its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only set the automatic transmission to the respective drive positions when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train. ! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures (below +20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold. Key positions Driving and parking G WARNING 159 Key g To remove the key 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine i If the key does not belong to the vehicle, it can still be turned in the ignition lock. However, the ignition will not be switched on. The engine cannot be started. KEYLESS-GO General notes Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with keys featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the key must be in the vehicle. When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only Z Driving and parking 160 Driving the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key determines whether a valid key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. To start the vehicle without actively using the key: Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock Rthe key must be in the vehicle Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 83) Rdo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key together with: - electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key - metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film Rdo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key together with metallic objects, such as a metal case, for example This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO. The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. Key positions with KEYLESS-GO : Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock When you switch on the ignition, all of the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after starting the engine or lights up while driving, see (Y page 288). If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition. X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button : once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windscreen wipers, for example. i If you then open the driver's door when in this position, the voltage supply is switched off. X To switch on the ignition: press Start/ Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. The ignition is switched off if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : once when in this position Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the key. It is only possible to switch between Start/ Stop button mode and key operation when the transmission is in position P. Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the key is in the vehicle: X Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. ! Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine. Starting the engine Important safety notes G WARNING General notes i Vehicles with a petrol engine: the cat- alytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Ropen doors and endanger other persons or road users Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rreleasing the parking brake Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position P. The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display shows P. i You can start the engine in transmission position P and N. Starting procedure with the key i To start the engine using the key instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. Vehicles with a diesel engine: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). The % preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X Turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 159) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X i Vehicles with a diesel engine: you can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm. Z 161 Driving and parking Driving Driving 162 Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine Driving and parking i The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the key into the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 159). Vehicles with a petrol engine: the engine starts. Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow is activated and the engine starts. X Pulling away General notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. ! If a warning tone sounds and the Release park. brake message appears in the multifunction display, the parking brake is still applied. Release the parking brake. i Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away. i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 255). i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. If the brake pedal is not depressed, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved, but the parking lock remains engaged. i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Hill start assist is not active if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient Rthe transmission is in position N Rthe parking brake is applied RESP® is malfunctioning ECO start/stop function Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. General notes : ECO start/stop display If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you switch on the engine using the key or the Start/Stop button. If the ECO start/stop function has been manually deactivated (Y page 164) or a malfunction has caused the system to be deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not displayed. AMG vehicles: the Stop/Start active or Stop/Start inactive message in the AMG menu in the multifunction display goes out. AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program C. For further information on automatic engine switch-off (Y page 163) and automatic engine start (Y page 164). Automatic engine switch-off General notes If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The ECO start/stop function is operational and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in the multifunction display, if: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached Rthe battery is sufficiently charged Rthe system detects that the windscreen is not misted up when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe bonnet is closed Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened If the conditions for automatic engine switchoff are not all fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is lit yellow. AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multifunction display additionally shows the Stop/ Start inactive message. i If you shift the transmission from R to D, the ECO start/stop function is available again once the ¤ symbol reappears in green in the multifunction display. i All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is switched off automatically. Z 163 Driving and parking Driving 164 Driving Driving and parking i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): automatic engine switch-off can take place a maximum of four times consecutively (initial stop, then three subsequent stops). The ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display after the engine has been started automatically for the fourth time. When the ¤ symbol is lit green in the multifunction display, automatic engine switch-off is again possible. Rthe system detects moisture on the windscreen when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's charge status is too low i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. i If you shift the transmission from R to D, i AMG vehicles: the number of consecu- the ECO start/stop function is available again once the ¤ symbol reappears in green in the multifunction display. i The HOLD function can also be activated Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ stop function tive automatic engine stops is unlimited. if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. All vehicles (except AMG vehicles) Automatic engine start The engine is started automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button Rin transmission position D or N, the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is not active Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou engage reverse gear R Ryou move the transmission out of position P Ryou switch to drive program S, S+ or M (AMG vehicles) Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range To switch off: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go out. X To switch on: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 163) are met, the ¤ symbol is lit green in the multifunction display. If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 163) are met, the ¤ symbol is lit yellow in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. X i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/ stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. Driving 165 X Driving and parking AMG vehicles To switch off: in drive program C, press ECO button :. or Switch to drive program S, S+ or M (Y page 172). Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go out. The Stop/Start active or Stop/Start inactive message in the AMG menu in the multifunction display goes out. X To activate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If drive program S, S+ or M is active, the automatic transmission switches to drive program C. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 163) are met, the ¤ symbol is lit green in the multifunction display. In addition, the Stop/Start active message is shown in the AMG menu in the multifunction display. If the conditions for automatic engine switch-off are not all fulfilled (Y page 163), the ECO symbol ¤ is shown in yellow. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available. In addition, the Stop/ Start inactive display message is shown in the AMG menu in the multifunction display. X i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/ stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. Z 166 Driving Driving and parking Problems with the engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 200) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 198). X Try to start the engine again. The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the key in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 161). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery. RThere If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine does not The fuel tank is empty. start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle. can be heard. The reserve fuel warning lamp is lit and the fuel gauge display shows 0. The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 355). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Vehicles with a petrol engine: The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The coolant temperaThe coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently. more than 120 †. The X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to coolant warning lamp cool down. may also be on and a X Check the coolant level (Y page 331). Observe the warning warning tone may notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. sound. If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. Automatic transmission Important safety notes cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehiZ 167 Driving and parking Automatic transmission 168 Automatic transmission Selector lever (AMG vehicles) Engaging park position P Driving and parking Overview of transmission positions X Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive When the vehicle is stationary, press button :. DIRECT SELECT lever Overview of transmission positions Transmission position and drive program display ! If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. For this purpose, we recommend selecting transmission position D and automatic drive program E (drive program C in AMG vehicles) or S. j k i h Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. : Transmission position display ; Drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display (Y page 169) in the multifunction display. Automatic transmission Transmission position and drive program display i Neutral h Drive ! If the transmission position display in the X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P. i The automatic transmission shifts into park position P automatically: Rif you open the driver's door while the vehicle is stationary in transmission position D or R Rif you open the door while travelling at very low speeds in transmission position D or R i Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down disengages the parking lock. The transmission is in N neutral. In order to shift from park position P directly into R or D: : Transmission position display ; Drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. Rdepress the brake pedal and the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down past the first point of resistance i The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever. Engaging park position P ! If the engine speed is too high, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. Rpush Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. i The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. For further information on the ECO start/ stop function, see (Y page 163). j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear Z Driving and parking multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program E or S. 169 Automatic transmission 170 Driving and parking Shifting to neutral N G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Transmission positions B Ropen doors and endanger other persons or road users out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rclimb the parking brake the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. Rremove the key off the engine when in R or D and open one of the front doors Rswitch Rreleasing Rshifting X C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. A Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. If you switch off the engine using the key or the Start/Stop button, the automatic transmission shifts to neutral N automatically. Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. Engaging drive position D X Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Do not shift the transmission into position P (Y page 180) unless the vehicle is stationary. The automatic transmission shifts to P automatically if you: Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. ! Rolling in neutral N can lead to damage to the transmission. 7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Automatic transmission Changing gear Rthe selected drive program (Y page 171) Rthe position of the accelerator pedal (Y page 171) Rthe road speed Driving and parking the middle of the engine speed range. This also applies if cruise control, DISTRONIC PLUS or SPEEDTRONIC are activated. Driving tips The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. Gearshifting is determined by: Program selector button General notes Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts throttle: late upshifts Rmore AMG vehicles When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch function reduces load change reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by the double-clutch function depends on the drive program selected. All vehicles (except CLS 350, AMG vehicles and vehicles with the AMG Sports package) X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired gearshift program appears in the multifunction display. Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration: Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. X Towing a trailer 171 Vehicles with the AMG Sports package X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display. Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients. X Manual drive program: depending on the uphill or downhill gradient, shift into a gear (Y page 174) in which the engine will run in X Z Automatic transmission 172 Driving and parking AMG vehicles CLS 350 X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display. The program selector button allows you to choose between different driving characteristics. i Further information about permanent drive program M (Y page 175). In addition to permanent drive program M, you can also activate temporary drive program M (Y page 174). E Economy Comfortable, economical driving E+ Economy Plus Comfortable, particularly economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style M Manual Manual gearshifting i For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 173). i The automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program E each time the engine is started. Drive program selector with manual drive program X Turn drive program selector : until the desired drive program appears in the multifunction display in the speedometer. The drive program indicator on drive program selector : lights up in red. i Further information about permanent drive program M (Y page 175). In addition to permanent drive program M, you can also activate temporary drive program M (Y page 174). C Controlled Efficiency Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty driving style M Manual Manual gearshifting RS RACE START Optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill i For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 173). i The automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program C each time the engine is started. i RS cannot be selected during normal driving. For further information on RACE START, see (Y page 201). Automatic transmission Steering wheel gearshift paddles 173 Automatic drive program E+ (CLS 350) Rcomfort-oriented In the manual drive program, you can change gears manually using steering wheel gearshift paddles : and ;. Further information about permanent drive program M (Y page 175). Further information about temporary drive program M (Y page 174). i You can only change gear with the steer- ing wheel gearshift paddles when the transmission is in position D. Automatic drive program Automatic drive program E Drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) is characterised by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic transmission settings. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin. engine and automatic transmission settings. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin. Roverrun mode is active in the 60 km/h to 160 km/h speed range if: - the combustion engine is disconnected from the drive train - the engine speed is equal to the engine idling speed - the multifunction display shows drive program E+ and the transmission position display goes out (Y page 169) Drive program E+ can be activated under the following conditions: Rthe speed range lies between 60 km/h and 160 km/h type of road is suitable, e.g. no steep gradients Ryou are no longer depressing the accelerator pedal Drive program E+ is deactivated under the following conditions: Rthe Ryou depress the accelerator pedal depress the brake pedal Ryou use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position (Y page 168) Ryou switch to drive program E or S (Y page 171) Ryou Z Driving and parking Drive program E+ is characterised by the following: 174 Automatic transmission Ryou Ryou are driving slower than 60 km/h are driving faster than 160 km/h Driving and parking Automatic drive program S Drive program S (or, in the case of AMG vehicles, drive programs S and S+) is characterised by the following: Rsporty engine and automatic transmission settings Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later Ras a result of the later automatic transmission shift points, the fuel consumption possibly being higher Manual drive program M General notes In this drive program, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The transmission must be in position D. You can activate manual drive program M in the E, E+ (CLS 350) and S automatic drive programs. transmission immediately shifts into the next gear up or down, if permitted. X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 173). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. i If the maximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage. To shift down: pull on the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 173). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. i If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. X i Automatic downshifting occurs when coasting. Gearshift recommendation i In addition to temporary drive program M, you can also activate permanent drive program M (Y page 171). Further information about permanent drive program M (Y page 175). Activating X Shift the transmission to position D. X Pull the left or right steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 173). Manual drive program M is temporarily activated. The selected gear and M appear in the multifunction display. Shifting gears If you pull on the left or right steering wheel gearshift paddle, the automatic transmission switches to manual drive program M for a limited amount of time. Depending on which gearshift paddle is pulled, the automatic The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Deactivating If you have activated manual drive program M, it will remain active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain. If manual drive program M has been deactivated, the automatic transmission shifts into the automatic drive program that was last selected, i.e. E, E+ (CLS 350) or S. You can also deactivate manual drive program M yourself: X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle and hold it in place (Y page 173). Upshifting (all vehicles except AMG vehicles) X or X Manual drive program M can be selected using the program selector button or the drive program selector. In manual drive program M, you can change gear yourself using the steering wheel gearshift paddles if the transmission is in position D. Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. or X Use the program selector button to change the drive program (Y page 171). Manual drive program M is deactivated. The automatic transmission switches into the automatic drive program that was last selected, i.e. E, E+ (CLS 350) or S. Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. Upshifting (AMG vehicles) ! In manual gearshift program M, the auto- matic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. You must make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. Manual drive program (AMG vehicles and vehicles with the AMG Sports package) General notes In this drive program, you can permanently change gear yourself by using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The transmission must be in position D. i As well as this permanent drive program M, you can also activate temporary drive program M (Y page 174). Activating the manual drive program Press the program selector button (Y page 171) until M appears in the multifunction display. X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program selector (Y page 172) until M appears in the multifunction display. The indicator M on the drive program selector lights up in red. X : Gear indicator ; Upshift indicator X If the colour in the speedometer multifunction display changes to red and the UP display message is shown, shift up a gear. Z 175 Driving and parking Automatic transmission Automatic transmission 176 Gearshift recommendation i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use kickdown in manual drive program M. Driving and parking Deactivating the manual drive program Press the program selector button (Y page 171) repeatedly until E or S appears in the multifunction display. X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program selector (Y page 172) until C, S or S+ appears in the multifunction display. X The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X If relevant gearshift recommendation : appears in the multifunction display on the instrument cluster, pull on the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 173). The automatic transmission shifts to recommended gear ;. Downshifting X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. i If you slow down or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission automatically shifts down. i For maximum acceleration, pull the left- hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until the transmission selects the optimum gear for the current speed. Kickdown You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. X Refuelling 177 Problems with the transmission Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop. longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Refuelling Important safety notes G WARNING If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- G WARNING G WARNING Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up. Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. oughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. G WARNING Vehicles with a diesel engine: Z Driving and parking Problem Driving and parking 178 Refuelling If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, components in the exhaust system may overheat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to diesel fuel. ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle. For further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 399). Refuelling General notes Observe the important safety notes (Y page 177). The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you open or close the vehicle with the key or using KEYLESS-GO. The position of the 8 fuel filler cap is displayed in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Opening the fuel filler flap Opening the fuel filler flap (example: CLS Coupé) : To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap = Tyre pressure table ? Fuel type to be refuelled Switch off the engine. Remove the key from the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. This corresponds to key position 0: "key removed". The driver's door can be closed again. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap opens slightly. X Open the fuel filler flap fully. X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of fuel filler flap ;. X CLS Coupé: insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of fuel filler flap ;. or X CLS Shooting Brake: insert the fuel filler cap, held in a horizontal position, into the X X Refuelling Pull the emergency release in the direction of arrow ;. The fuel filler flap is released. X Open the fuel filler flap. X Driving and parking recesses in the fuel filler flap hinge arm from above. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel filling pumps. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. Closing the fuel filler flap Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. X i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the central locking prevents the fuel filler flap from closing. 179 CLS Shooting Brake: open the tailgate. Open the right-hand side trim panel. X Fold down the trim. X Detach the emergency release from retainer :. X Pull the emergency release in the direction of arrow ;. The fuel filler flap is released. X Open the fuel filler flap. X X Fuel filler flap emergency release CLS Coupé: open the boot lid. Slide the luggage net down. X Open the right-hand side trim panel. X Remove the first-aid kit (Y page 344). X Detach the emergency release from retainer :. X X Z 180 Parking Problems with the fuel and fuel tank Driving and parking This section provides descriptions of and solutions to safety-relevant problems. Descriptions of and solutions to further problems can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. vehicle. G WARNING There is a risk of fire or explosion. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately and remove it (Y page 159). X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking G WARNING Important safety notes If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Rstart ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe parking brake must be applied transmission must be in position P and the key must be removed from the ignition lock Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the kerb on steep uphill or downhill gradients Rthe Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Vehicles with automatic transmission Firmly depress the parking brake. X All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): shift the transmission to position P. X If you shift the automatic transmission to N before switching off the engine, the automatic transmission remains in N even if the driver's door or the front-passenger door is opened. Using KEYLESS-GO Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 159). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. i If you use the Start/Stop button to switch off the engine, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. If you then open one of the front doors, the automatic transmission shifts to P. X i The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for about three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. Parking brake G WARNING Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button X AMG vehicles: when the vehicle is stationary, press button :. Using the key Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. i If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. If you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the key from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P. If you must brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels could lock. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the wheels lock, release the parking brake until the wheels begin turning again. X G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstart the engine Z 181 Driving and parking Parking Driving tips Driving and parking 182 In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Driving tips General notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. ECO display The brake lights do not light up when you brake the vehicle with the parking brake. X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly. The J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if the engine is running. X To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Pull release handle :. The J indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Parking up the vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. X Example: ECO display The ECO display provides feedback on how economical your driving characteristics are. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Consumption can be significantly influenced by your driving style. The ECO display consists of three bars: RAcceleration RConstant RCoasting The percentage count is the mean value of the three bar values. The three bars and the mean value begin at the value of 50%. A higher percentage count indicates a more economical driving style. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed consumption. Driving tips Rload Rtyre pressure start Rchoice of route Rthe use of electrical consumers These factors are not included in the ECO display. The evaluation of your driving style takes the following three categories into consideration: RAcceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes): - the bar fills up: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds - the bar empties: sporty acceleration RConstant (assessment of driving behaviour at all times): - the bar fills up: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration - the bar empties: fluctuations in speed RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration processes): - the bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes - the bar empties: frequent braking Rcold a journey. During a prolonged driving time, these changes are smaller. For more dynamic changes, perform a manual reset. Further information on the ECO display (Y page 244). Brakes Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients Do not depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by constantly applying light pressure to the pedal. This results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle and when towing a trailer. i An economical driving style involves driv- i This also applies if you have activated i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. ing at a moderate engine speed. To achieve a higher value in the categories Acceleration and Constant Constant: Robserve the gearshift recommendation Rdrive the vehicle in drive program E on the motorway, only the bar for Constant will change. i The ECO display summarises the driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are dynamic changes in the bars at the start of cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC PLUS. Heavy and light loads G WARNING The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking distance and could Z Driving and parking In addition to driving style, the consumption is affected by many other factors, such as: 183 Driving and parking 184 Driving tips even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet road surfaces If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after a car wash or after driving through deep water. You will have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salt-treated roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and pads. This can increase the braking distance considerably. RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions. RCarefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey. RMaintain a much greater distance to the vehicle in front. New brake pads/linings Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings fitted to your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. AMG high-performance and ceramic brakes The high-performance brake system is only available on AMG vehicles. The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This is dependent on: Rspeed Rbraking force Renvironmental conditions, such as temper- ature and humidity The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage (service life) that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain further Driving tips Driving on wet roads Aquaplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: Ryou are driving at low speeds tyres have adequate tread depth For this reason, drive in the following manner in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which aquaplaning can occur: Rthe Rlower your speed tyre ruts Ravoid sudden steering movements Rbrake carefully Ravoid Driving on flooded roads ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise damage the engine, the electronics or the transmission. If you must drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rthe maximum permissible fording depth in still water is 25 cm Ryou should drive no faster than walking pace Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: Move the transmission to position N. X Try to bring the vehicle under control by using corrective steering. X The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device Z Driving and parking information about this from your MercedesBenz Service Centre. Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Always be aware of this and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during the running-in period. Excessive heavy braking results in correspondingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wear warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. If you regularly drive at high speeds, it is particularly important to have the brake system checked and maintained regularly. 185 Driving and parking 186 Driving systems and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing weather conditions. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point. Further information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 367). For more information on driving with summer tyres, see (Y page 366). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 366). dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in the lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed (e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads) Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Cruise control lever Driving systems Cruise control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must select a low gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer (CLS Shooting Brake only). By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions are appropriate for maintaining a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 30 km/h. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an acci- : To activate or increase speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To activate at the current speed/last stored speed ? To activate or reduce speed A To switch between cruise control and var- iable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate cruise control You can operate cruise control and variable SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. Driving systems The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: 187 Storing and maintaining the current speed indicator lamp off: cruise control is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. Selecting cruise control You can accept the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h. X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is off. If it is off, cruise control is already selected. If it is not off, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. Activation conditions To activate cruise control, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe parking brake must be released. are driving faster than 30 km/h. ® RESP must be switched on, but not intervening. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe cruise control function must be selected (Y page 187). Ryou i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically braking the vehicle. Storing the current speed and calling up the last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Z Driving and parking RLIM Driving systems 188 Driving and parking briefly up : or down ; beyond the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 10 km/h increments. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Deactivating cruise control Setting a speed There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards =. or X Brake. or Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 1 km/h increments. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: press the cruise control lever X X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever lights up. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou depress the parking brake are driving at less than 30 km/h RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Ryou shift the transmission to position N while driving If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise con‐ Ryou Driving systems trol off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored is cleared when you 189 Variable SPEEDTRONIC General notes Driving and parking switch off the engine. SPEEDTRONIC Important safety notes SPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that you do not exceed the set speed. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. If you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEEDTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. SPEEDTRONIC cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. SPEEDTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. You can set a variable or permanent limit speed: Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up areas Rpermanent for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres fitted : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; LIM indicator lamp = To store the current speed and calling up the last stored speed ? To store the current speed or a lower speed A To switch between cruise control or DIS- TRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC B To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC With the cruise control lever, you can operate cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the limit speed stored. Z Driving systems 190 Driving and parking Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the limit speed stored. X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is on. If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever is lit. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. Storing the current speed Storing the current speed and calling up the last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. Setting a speed X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. The current speed is stored and shown in the multifunction display. The segments in the multifunction display light up from the start of the scale up to the stored speed. You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : past the pressure point for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond the pressure point until the desired Driving systems Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC It is not possible to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC by braking. the stored speed. You will hear a warning tone if this is the case. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed permanently to a value between 160 km/h(e.g. for driving on winter tyres) and the maximum speed (Y page 255). Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display. Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active, even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, even if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). DISTRONIC PLUS General notes There are several ways to deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Briefly move the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is automatically deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). It is only switched off if your current speed does not differ by more than 20 km/h from DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Without your intervention, DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately to increase the distance to the vehicle driving in front, or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. Z Driving and parking speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. 191 Driving and parking 192 Driving systems For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor system must be operational. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control in the speed range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a vehicle is driving in front of you, it operates in the speed range between 0 km/h and 200 km/h. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. Important safety notes G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Roncoming G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by DISTRONIC PLUS. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road and weather conditions or traffic conditions into account. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, for example, in multi-storey car parks Rsnow Driving systems Rbe too high for a filter lane or a slip road Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive countries) Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right (right-hand drive countries) If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS Cruise control lever X : To store the current speed or a higher speed ; To set the specified minimum distance = LIM indicator lamp ? To store the current speed and calling up the last stored speed A To store the current speed or a lower speed B To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC C To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS You can operate DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is off. If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selected. If it is not off, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS Activation conditions To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be running. It may take up to two minutes of driving before DISTRONIC PLUS is ready for use. Rthe parking brake must be released. RESP® must be switched on, but not intervening. RActive Parking Assist must not be activated. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe bonnet must be closed. Z Driving and parking If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate to the speed stored. This speed can: 193 Driving systems 194 Driving and parking Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and the rear doors must be closed. Rthe vehicle must not be skidding. Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS function must be selected with the cruise control lever (Y page 193). Activating i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS suspended message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. Activating at the current speed/last stored speed G WARNING If you call up a stored speed and this is different from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or brakes. If you do not know what the stored speed is, the vehicle may accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Take the traffic conditions into account before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know what the stored speed is, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ;, or press it up : or down =. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly up : or down = until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. X If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your vehicle is stationary as well. When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected and is shown in the multifunction display. If the vehicle in front is no longer detected and displayed, DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and you will hear a tone. The DISTRONIC PLUS assistance graphic in the instrument cluster shows whether a vehicle in front has been detected (Y page 249). Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. X Driving systems Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Pulling away and driving 195 Changing lanes If you change to the overtaking lane, DISTRONIC PLUS supports you if: are driving faster than 60 km/h PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front Ryou have switched on the corresponding turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision If these conditions are met, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. X i When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the left lane (on left-handdrive vehicles) or the right lane (on righthand-drive vehicles). Vehicles with COMAND Online i The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. There is a risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at all times. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. Example: roundabout i The following function is not operational in all countries. DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information from your navigation system so that it can adapt to certain traffic situations. This is the case if, while following a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you: Rapproach or drive around a roundabout a T-junction Rturn off at a motorway exit Rapproach Z Driving and parking Ryou RDISTRONIC Driving and parking 196 Driving systems Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarily maintains the current driving speed and does not accelerate. This is based on the current map data in the navigation system. Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to the speed you set. Stopping G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. i Depending on the specified minimum dis- tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Rthe bonnet is opened Ra system fault occurs Rthe power supply is insufficient Setting a speed Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the new speed stored. X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 1 km/h increments. X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h increments: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; beyond the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 10 km/h increments. X Driving systems PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the speedometer Setting the specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS maintains to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 197). i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient distance to the vehicle in front and comply with the minimum distance as required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two segments ; in the set speed range light up. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front : and stored speed = light up. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the multifunction display General notes In the Assistance menu (Y page 249) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistance graphic. To increase: turn control = in direction ;. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control = in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator: current distance to the vehicle in front Z Driving and parking i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC 197 Driving systems 198 = Specified minimum distance to the vehi- Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS cle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle Driving and parking X Select the Distance display function using the on-board computer (Y page 249). Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. or : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front; adjustable = Own vehicle ? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears when the cruise control lever is actuated) You will see the stored speed for approximately five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. X Select the Distance display function using the on-board computer (Y page 249). i You will see the stored speed for approximately five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou apply the parking brake are driving slower than 25 km/h and there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle in front is no longer detected RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the frontRyou Driving systems Vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS General notes Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations: RCornering, going into and coming out of a bend RVehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane ROther vehicles changing lane RNarrow vehicles RObstructions and stationary vehicles RCrossing vehicles In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small. Other vehicles changing lane Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle is too small. Narrow vehicles The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. Z Driving and parking passenger door or one of the rear doors is open Rthe vehicle is skidding Ryou activate Active Parking Assist If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DIS‐ TRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. 199 200 Driving systems Driving and parking DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the carriageway, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small. Obstructions and stationary vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. Crossing vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. HOLD function General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD function is deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Important safety notes G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by the accelerator pedal being depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle from rolling away. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash Driving systems You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe vehicle is stationary engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Rthe driver's door is closed or if your seat belt is fastened Rthe parking brake is released. Rthe bonnet is closed Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated Rthe Activating the HOLD function Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until ë disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function Rthe bonnet is opened Ra system fault occurs Rthe power supply is not sufficient RACE START Important safety notes i Observe the safety notes for the SPORT Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until ë : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. Ryou shift the transmission to position P. handling mode (Y page 74). Only activate RACE START on dedicated race circuits. RACE START enables optimum acceleration from a standing start. The precondition for this is a suitable high-grip road surface. i RACE START is only available in AMG vehicles. Activation conditions You can activate RACE START if: Rthe doors are closed Rthe engine is running and it has reached an operating temperature of approximately 80 †. This is the case when the engine oil temperature in the multifunction display stops flashing. RSPORT handling mode is activated (Y page 74). Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position Z Driving and parking Activation conditions 201 Driving systems 202 vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot) Rthe transmission is in position D Driving and parking Rthe Activating RACE START Depress the brake pedal with your left foot and keep it depressed. X Turn the drive program selector clockwise (Y page 172) until the RS lamp lights up. The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in the multifunction display. i If the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. X X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 173). or To confirm: pull the right steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 173). The RACE START available Depress accelerator message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal fully within two seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. X Fully depress the accelerator pedal. The engine speed rises to approximately 3,500 rpm. The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not release the brake pedal within five seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. X X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START active message appears in the multifunction display. RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h. Drive program S+ is activated. SPORT handling mode remains activated. RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. i After using it several times in short succession, RACE START will be unavailable until a certain distance has been driven. AIRMATIC Vehicle level Important safety notes G WARNING People's limbs may become trapped if they are located underneath the vehicle or between the vehicle body and the tyres when the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of injury. When lowering the vehicle, make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches. G WARNING Vehicles with level control: The vehicle is slightly lowered if you: Rhave selected comfort suspension tuning and Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately 60 seconds of switching off the engine You and people in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody may thus become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody when you lock the vehicle. ! The vehicle is lowered by about 15 mm if: Ryou have selected "Comfort tuning" switch off the engine and Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately 60 seconds When parking, position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the kerb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Ryou If you unlock the vehicle within 60 seconds of having switched the engine off, the vehicle is lowered slightly when Comfort suspension mode is selected. Observe the notes on driving with a trailer (Y page 233). Your vehicle regulates its height automatically. All-round level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. The following vehicle levels are possible: Setting the vehicle level Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. Setting the raised level X If indicator lamp ; is not lit: X RNormal the vehicle is raised by approximately 25 mm when compared with the normal level RLowered: the vehicle is lowered by approximately 10 mm when compared with the normal level The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can be set manually. The "Lowered" vehicle level is set automatically: Start the engine. RRaised: Press button : . Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle height is adjusted to the raised level. The Vehicle rising message appears in the display. The "Raised level" setting is cancelled if you: Rdrive at a speed over approximately 120 km/h Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a speed over 80 km/h The "Raised level" remains saved when you are not driving within these speed ranges. Rat Setting the normal level X Start the engine. Rif If indicator lamp ; is lit: speeds above 140 km/h you have selected "Comfort mode" (Y page 204) and then lock the vehicle within 60 seconds of the engine being switched off Rif you have selected "Sport mode" (Y page 204) X Press button : . Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to normal level. Z 203 Driving and parking Driving systems 204 Driving systems Driving and parking Suspension setting General notes The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sport or comfort Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. Rthe Sport mode X Press button :. Indicator lamp = lights up. You have selected "Comfort mode". The AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. AMG RIDE CONTROL sport suspension Important safety notes G WARNING People's limbs may become trapped if they are located underneath the vehicle or between the vehicle body and the tyres when the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of injury. When lowering the vehicle, make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches. G WARNING Vehicles with level control: The vehicle is slightly lowered if you: Rhave The firmer suspension setting in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected "Sport mode". The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. Comfort mode In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. Select Comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of motorway. selected comfort suspension tuning and Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately 60 seconds of switching off the engine You and people in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody may thus become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody when you lock the vehicle. ! The vehicle is lowered by about 20 mm if: Ryou have selected "Comfort tuning" Ryou switch off the engine and Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately 60 seconds When parking, position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the kerb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Suspension setting If indicator lamps = and ? are off: General notes The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: X If indicator lamp ? lights up: Ryour X driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport + or Comfort Sport mode : Mode selection button ; Button for storing, calling up and display- ing the selected mode = Sport + mode indicator lamp ? Sport mode indicator lamp The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press button : once. Indicator lamp ? lights up. You have selected Sport mode. The AMG Ride Control SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. Press button : twice. Indicator lamps = and ? light up. You have selected Sport + mode. The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display. Press button : once. Second indicator lamp = lights up. You have selected Sport + mode. The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display. Comfort mode When Comfort mode is selected, the handling characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. Select Comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of motorway. X Press button : repeatedly until indicator lamps = and ? go out. You have selected Comfort mode. The AMG Ride Control COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. Storing and calling up settings Once the suspension tuning and drive program have been selected, you can store and call up your settings using AMG button ;. X To store: press AMG button ; until you hear a tone. X To call up: press AMG button ;. The stored suspension tuning and drive program are selected. X To display: briefly press AMG button ;. Your selection appears in the multifunction display. Sport + mode The very firm setting of the suspension tuning in Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode primarily when driving on race circuits. Z 205 Driving and parking Driving systems 206 Driving systems Vehicle level Important safety notes Driving and parking G WARNING People's limbs may become trapped if they are located underneath the vehicle or between the vehicle body and the tyres when the vehicle is lowering. There is a danger of injury. When lowering the vehicle, make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches. The vehicle may be lowered if you press the suspension tuning selector button or the AMG button. The vehicle is lowered even if the vehicle is at a standstill. ! If Sport or Sport + suspension tuning has been selected, the vehicle's ground clearance decreases. Make sure that no objects become trapped or that the vehicle has not been damaged, for example, on the kerb. i The vehicle level at the rear axle may change visibly if you park the vehicle and the outside temperature changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle level lowers; with an increase in temperature, the vehicle level rises. Changing the rear axle level This function is only available for the CLS 63 AMG 4MATIC and CLS 63 AMG Shooting Brake. The vehicle level at the rear axle depends on the selected suspension mode and the vehicle speed. The vehicle level at the rear axle changes while driving depending on which suspension mode is selected: RComfort: +10 mm + and Sport: -15 mm When changing from Comfort to Sport or Sport +, the axle is lowered approximately 25 mm. When changing from Sport or Sport + to Comfort, the axle is raised approximately RSport 25 mm. The level change also occurs when stationary. If you drive faster than 170 km/h, the rear axle level is set to a middle level. This increases road safety and reduces air resistance. If you then drive slower than 150 km/h, the level of the rear axle is again adjusted to correspond to the selected suspension mode. Load compensation The vehicle can compensate differences in the vehicle level by raising or lowering the rear axle. This is the case, for example, when people get out of the vehicle or when luggage is removed. A load compensation occurs if: Ra door or the boot lid/tailgate is opened parked vehicle is unlocked The engine needs to be running for larger level changes. Rthe 4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive) If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in the lane. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: Rwhen pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary Raccelerate less when driving ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if Driving systems 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. PARKTRONIC Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. Range of the sensors General notes PARKTRONIC does not take into account obstacles located: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and objects which absorb ultrasonic sources. Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. : Example: sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 337). PARKTRONIC is activated automatically if you: Rswitch on the ignition the transmission to position D, R or N Rrelease the parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. Rshift Example: side view Z Driving and parking you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary. 207 208 Driving systems Driving and parking Warning displays Example: top view Front sensors Centre Approx. 100 cm Corners Approx. 60 cm Rear sensors Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle = Segments showing operational readiness Centre Approx. 120 cm Corners Approx. 80 cm Minimum distance Centre Approx. 20 cm Corners Approx. 15 cm If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the centre air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the roof lining in the rear compartment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Transmission position Warning display D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards Rear and front areas activated P No areas activated Driving systems 209 One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. Driving and parking Rsixth Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC : Indicator lamp ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Towing a trailer ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. Z 210 Driving systems Problems with PARKTRONIC Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 337). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Active Parking Assist General notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention can assist you during parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 207). Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the manoeuvring range. When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. G WARNING The vehicle will veer out when parking and can take you onto sections of the oncoming lane. As a result, you may collide with other road users. There is a risk of an accident. When parking, pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tyres. Active Parking Assist may also display spaces not suitable for parking, e.g.: Rparking or stopping prohibitions Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Runsuitable surfaces Parking tips: Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possible past the parking space. Rparking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly. Rparking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 208) warning messages during the parking procedure. Rat any time, you can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it. Active Parking Assist will then be cancelled. Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Rnever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted. Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel Rthat are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. G WARNING If objects are located above the detection range, Active Parking Assist may start to steer into the parking space too soon. As a result, you could cause a collision. There is a risk of an accident. If objects are located above the detection range, stop the vehicle and switch Active Parking Assist off. For further information on the detection range (Y page 207). Active Parking Assist does not support you parking in spaces that are parallel to the direction of travel if: Rthe parking space is on a kerb stone system reads the parking space as being blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to manoeuvre into Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer Rthe Example: detected parking space : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Active Parking Assist is activated automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: Rparallel to the direction of travel are at least 1.5 m wide Rthat are at least 1.3 m longer than your vehicle Rthat Z 211 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems Driving and parking 212 When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will see parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain switched on until you acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. i In the case of parking spaces that are at right angles to the direction of travel, please ensure that the parking space is long enough to accommodate your vehicle. A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 15 m away from it. X or X Stop the vehicle when the parking symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Shift the transmission to position R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X To park using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Release the multifunction steering wheel. Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When reversing, drive at a speed below 10 km/h. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be cancelled. i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve the best parking results by backing up as far as possible. When doing so, also observe the PARKTRONIC messages. X X X Parking G WARNING Active Parking Assist merely aids you by intervening actively in the steering. There is a risk of accident if you do not apply the brakes yourself. Always apply the brakes yourself when parking and manoeuvring. To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. The Park Assist active Select D Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. X The Park Assist active Select R Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Driving systems Parking tips: RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the kerb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. RYou can also engage forward gear prematurely. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should a gear be changed too early, the parking procedure will be cancelled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position. Cancelling Active Parking Assist The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. Active Parking Assist is cancelled automatically if: Rthe transmission is shifted too early electric parking brake is applied Rtransmission position P is selected Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible Ryou are driving faster than 10 km/h Ra wheel spins and ESP® intervenes or fails. In such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol goes out and the Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. When Active Parking Assist is cancelled, you must steer again yourself. Rthe Towing a trailer For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the minimum length for parking spaces is slightly increased. If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Once the electrical connection is established between your vehicle and the trailer, Active Parking Assist is no longer available. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any time. X Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be cancelled at once. The Park Assist cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. or X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the centre console (Y page 209). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately cancelled. Z Driving and parking Additional transmission shifts may be necessary. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist switched off message appears in the multifunction display and you will hear a tone. PARKTRONIC continues to be available. X Manoeuvre if necessary. X Always observe the warning messages displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 208). 213 214 Driving systems Reversing camera Driving and parking General notes Example: Coupé Reversing camera : is located in the handle strip of the boot lid/tailgate. Reversing camera : is an optical parking and manoeuvring aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guide lines in the COMAND display. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror. Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The field of vision and other functions of the reversing camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. licence plate holder, bicycle rack). Activating/deactivating the reversing camera i The text of messages shown in the COMAND display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of reversing camera messages in the COMAND display. Important safety notes The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. Under the following circumstances, the reversing camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the boot lid/tailgate is open heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rin To activate: make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the "Activation by R gear" function is active in COMAND Online; see the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the COMAND display. X To change the function mode for vehicles with trailer tow hitch: using the COMAND controller, select symbol : for the "Reverse parking" function or symbol ; for "Coupling up a trailer", see the separate COMAND Online operating instructions. The symbol of the selected function is highlighted. X Driving systems Displays in the COMAND display The reversing camera may show a distorted view of obstacles or show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the reversing camera in the following locations: Rvery close to the rear bumper the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the tailgate/ boot Runder = CLS Coupé: yellow guide line for the vehi- cle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) = CLS Shooting Brake: red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) i The following reversing camera messages in the COMAND display correspond to the display in the CLS Coupé. The details of the display of the guide lines differ slightly for the CLS Shooting Brake. ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline. Rthe A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle centre axis (marker assistance) C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle (CLS Shooting Brake: 0.25 m) The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steer- ing wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) Z Driving and parking To deactivate: the reversing camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P or after driving forwards a short distance. 215 216 Driving systems Driving and parking ; CLS Shooting Brake: red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) = Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle (CLS Shooting Brake: 0.25 m) Make sure that the reversing camera is switched on (Y page 214). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X With the help of white guide lines :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. X Using white guide lines : as a guide, carefully reverse until you reach the end position. Red guide line ? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. X Additional display for vehicles with PARKTRONIC : Front warning display ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement operational readiness indicator = Rear warning display Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: when PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 207), additional measurement operational readiness indicator ; appears in the COMAND display. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light up correspondingly in the COMAND display. Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle "Reverse parking" function Reversing straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel : Parking space marking ; CLS Coupé: yellow guide line for the vehi- : White guide line without turning the steer- ing wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; CLS Coupé: yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) cle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ; CLS Shooting Brake: red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Driving systems Make sure that the reversing camera is switched on (Y page 214). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line ; reaches parking space marking :. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and reverse carefully. 217 Driving to the final position : White guide line at current steering wheel angle ; Parking space marking X Turn the steering wheel to the centre position while the vehicle is stationary. Reversing with the steering wheel turned : CLS Coupé: yellow guide line for the vehi- cle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) : CLS Shooting Brake: red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible. : Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle (CLS Shooting Brake: 0.25 m) ; White lane indicating the route the vehicle will take with the steering wheel straight = End of parking space X Reverse carefully until you have reached the end position. Red guide line : is then at end of parking space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. Z Driving and parking X Driving systems 218 Driving and parking "Coupling up a trailer" function apply to objects that are at the same level as the ball coupling. X Reverse carefully, making sure trailer drawbar locating aid ; points approximately in the direction of the trailer drawbar. X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar = reaches red guide line :. The distance between the trailer drawbar and the red guide line is now approximately 0.30 m. X Couple up the trailer (Y page 235). : Vehicle centre point on the yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ; Trailer drawbar This function is only available on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch. X Set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that it is slightly higher than the ball coupling. X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer drawbar ;. ATTENTION ASSIST General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on motorways and trunk roads. It is active in the 80 km/h to 180 km/h range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking the following criteria into account: Ryour : Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 0.30 m from the ball coupling ; Trailer drawbar locating aid = Trailer drawbar ? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" function X Use the COMAND controller to select symbol ?, see the separate operating instructions for COMAND Online. The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selected. The distance specifications now only personal driving style, e.g. steering characteristics Rjourney-related parameters, e.g. time of day, length of journey The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 80 km/h or faster than 180 km/h Rif you are currently using COMAND Online or making a telephone call with COMAND Online Driving systems Rif the time has been set incorrectly active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed Rin Speed Limit Assist General notes Driving and parking Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It may not always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration until too late, or may not detect them at all. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. Warning and display messages in the multifunction display Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 250). If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You then hear an intermittent warning tone twice and the Attention Assist: Take a break! message appears in the multifunction display. X If necessary, take a break. X Press the a button to confirm the message. X On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. ATTENTION ASSIST is reset and starts assessing your tiredness again when you continue your journey if: Ryou switch off the engine Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break 219 : Speed Limit Assist camera Speed Limit Assist shows you detected speed limits in the multifunction display. Data from the navigation system is also used for this purpose. If a traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit is detected, it is shown in the multifunction display. If Speed Limit Assist does not detect any traffic signs, the speed limit from the digital road map is taken and shown in the display. Speed Limit Assist detects the traffic signs with a camera attached behind the top of the windscreen. i Speed Limit Assist is not operational in all countries. Important safety notes Speed Limit Assist is only an aid and does not always detect traffic signs specifying the maximum permissible speed. Traffic signs always have priority over the Speed Limit Assist display. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from oncoming traffic Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Z Driving systems 220 dirt, snow or trees Rthe traffic signs are poorly illuminated Rthere are ambiguous traffic signs, for instance near roadworks or on multi-lane roads leave or enter a town road type changes (e.g. motorway, country road) Ryou have travelled a certain minimum distance without the traffic sign being repeated or detected again Information in the multifunction display i You can also activate Speed Limit Assist Driving and parking Rthe traffic signs are covered, for instance by Ryou Rthe using COMAND Online. The maximum permissible speed is shown in the COMAND display; see the COMAND Online operating instructions. Night View Assist Plus Important safety notes : Traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit (example) ; Units used in the traffic sign displayed Briefly showing detected traffic signs in the multifunction display X Activate the Speed Limit Assist warning function using the on-board computer (Y page 249). A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit : appears in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds as soon as it is detected. Any other information in the multifunction display is hidden for this period. Permanently showing detected traffic signs in the multifunction display X Display the assistance graphic using the on-board computer (Y page 249). A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the end of a speed limit : appears in the multifunction display as soon as it is detected. Traffic sign indicating a speed limit : is generally displayed until: Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the speed limit is detected Ryou make a turn Night View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Drive carefully and always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and traffic conditions. Night View Assist Plus cannot display objects directly in front of or beside the vehicle. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Ron bends, on uphill gradients or downhill gradients Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or inoperative if: Rpedestrians are partially or entirely obscured by objects, e.g. parked vehicles Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian in the Night View Assist Plus display is incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflections Driving systems do not contrast with the surroundings Rpedestrians are not in an upright position, e.g. sitting, squatting or lying Activating Night View Assist Plus Activation conditions You can only activate Night View Assist Plus if: Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock is dark Rthe light switch is in the à or L position Rreverse gear has not been engaged Rit Activating Night View Assist Plus In addition to the illumination provided by the normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus uses infrared light to illuminate the road. Night View Assist Plus camera : picks up the infrared light and displays a monochrome image in COMAND. The image displayed in COMAND corresponds to a road lit up by main-beam headlamps. This enables you to see the road's course and any obstacles in good time. When pedestrian recognition is active, pedestrians recognised by the system are highlighted in the Night View Assist Plus display. Light from the headlamps of oncoming vehicles does not affect the Night View Assist Plus display in the multifunction display. This is also the case if you cannot switch on the main-beam headlamps due to oncoming traffic. i Infrared light is not visible to the human eye and therefore does not dazzle. Night View Assist Plus can therefore remain switched on even if there is oncoming traffic. X X Make sure COMAND Online is switched on. Press button :. The Night View Assist Plus display appears in the COMAND display. You can read about how to adjust the brightness of the COMAND display in the COMAND Online operating instructions. i The infrared headlamps only switch on when the vehicle is being driven at speeds of at least 10 km/h. This means that you do not have the full visual range while stationary and cannot check whether Night View Assist Plus is working. Z Driving and parking Rpedestrians 221 222 Driving systems Driving and parking Pedestrian recognition : ; = ? Night View Assist Plus display Pedestrian recognised Framing Symbol for active pedestrian recognition i Animals are not recognised by pedestrian recognition. Night View Assist Plus can recognise pedestrians using typical characteristics, e.g. when there is a silhouette in the shape of a person. Pedestrian recognition is switched on automatically if: RNight View Assist Plus is activated. Ryou are driving faster than 10 km/h Rthe surroundings are dark, e.g. when driving outside built-up areas without street lighting. If pedestrian recognition is active, symbol ? appears. If pedestrians are detected, they are highlighted with framing =. If the pedestrian recognition system has brought a pedestrian to your attention, look through the windscreen to evaluate the situation. The actual distance to objects and pedestrians cannot be gauged accurately by looking at a screen. It may be the case that objects are highlighted as well as pedestrians. Misted up or dirty windscreen If the windscreen in front of the camera is misted up or dirty on the inside or outside, the Night View Assist Plus display is affected. To demist: check the automatic air conditioning settings (Y page 147) and fold down the camera cover (Y page 339). X To demist the inside of the windscreen: fold down the camera cover (Y page 339) and clean the windscreen (Y page 337). X Driving systems 223 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The picture quality of Night View Assist Plus has deteriorated. X The windscreen wipers are smearing the windscreen. Replace the wiper blades (Y page 134). The windscreen is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a car wash. X Clean the windscreen (Y page 337). There is windscreen chip damage in the camera's field of vision. Replace the windscreen. X The windscreen is misted up on the inside. Demist the windscreen (Y page 147). X The windscreen is iced up. X De-ice the windscreen (Y page 146). There is dirt on the inside of the windscreen. Clean the inside of the windscreen (Y page 337). X Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 223) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 225). Blind Spot Assist General notes Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. It supports you from speeds of 30 km/h. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible collision warning. For monitoring, Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper. Important safety notes G WARNING Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles: Rovertaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rwhen the difference in the speed of approach and overtaking is too great As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in these situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. Z Driving and parking Problems with Night View Assist Plus 224 Driving systems Monitoring range of the sensors In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Driving and parking Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, snow or spray Rnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles Rvery wide lanes Rnarrow lanes Rvehicles not driving in the middle of their lane Rbarriers or other road boundaries Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Indicator and warning display : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp CLS Coupé Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the edge of their lane nearest your vehicle. Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning always occurs when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from Driving systems Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Activating Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist (Y page 250) is activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. Towing a trailer If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors. To do so, you will need to deactivate Blind Spot Assist if: Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock Rthe engine is not running electrical connection to the trailer has been established Rthe Lane Keeping Assist General notes Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera : at the top of the windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. This function is available in the range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration through the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly identify lane markings. In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep in lane, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Rnot Z Driving and parking the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. 225 226 Driving systems Driving and parking G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, apply the brakes or accelerate the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construction area Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the road Activating Lane Keeping Assist X Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the onboard computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive (Y page 251). If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphic display (Y page 249) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. Standard If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Adaptive When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway Rthe system recognises solid lane markings The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes Ryou cut the corner on a bend Active Driving Assistance package General notes The Active Driving Assistance package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 191), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 227) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 229). Active Blind Spot Assist General notes Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible collision warning. If a risk of side impact is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the free space in the direction of travel and to the side before making a course-correcting brake application. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forwardfacing radar sensors. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 30 km/h. As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. Radar sensors The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator grille. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grille are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer function properly. Monitoring range G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles: Rovertaking too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rif the difference in the speed of approach and overtaking is too great Example: CLS Coupé Z 227 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 228 Driving systems Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. The detection of vehicles may be impaired in the case of: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray Vehicles in the monitoring range will then be indicated late or not at all. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the edge of their lane. Due to the nature of the system: Rpoor Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time Indicator and warning display If Active Blind Spot Assist is switched on, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. A warning is always issued when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is then no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. Visual and acoustic collision warning If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Course-correcting brake application : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. G WARNING A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. Driving systems Ryou 229 clearly brake or accelerate ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake RESP® is deactivated Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected Activating Active Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 250) is activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. Example: CLS Coupé If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a coursecorrecting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, the display shown in the lower image appears in the multifunction display. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. A coursecorrecting brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur if: are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, on both sides of your vehicle Ra vehicle approaches too closely on the side Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds Towing a trailer If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. Active Lane Keeping Assist General notes Rthere Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera : at the top of the windscreen. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your Z Driving and parking Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as Driving and parking 230 Driving systems lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. This function is available in the range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. It may not recognise traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured by snow Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construction area Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the road If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and broken lane markings are detected, no lane-correcting brake application is made. Warning vibration through the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Lane-correcting brake application G WARNING A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Driving systems G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic conditions or road users. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application, e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of an accident. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. If you leave your lane under certain circumstances, the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is intended to help you return the vehicle to the original lane. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display : appears in the multifunction display. A lane-correcting brake application can only be made after driving over a solid, recognisable lane marking. Before this, a warning must have been issued by means of intermittent vibration through the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognised. The brake application also slightly reduces driving speed. i A further lane-correcting brake applica- tion can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Ryou have switched on the turn signals Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist RESP® is deactivated Rthe transmission is not in position D Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the electrical connection to the trailer has been correctly established Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keeping Assist could misjudge the given traffic situation. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if: Ryou steer slightly in the opposite direction Ryou switch on the turn signal Ryou clearly brake or accelerate A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist Rlane markings are no longer detected Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist X Activate Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive (Y page 251). If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphic display (Y page 249) Z Driving and parking Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake application. 231 Driving and parking 232 Towing a trailer are shown in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognises certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway Rthe system recognises solid lane markings The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes Ryou cut the corner on a bend Towing a trailer If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Towing a trailer Important safety notes G WARNING The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking distance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle/trailer combination if it begins to swerve. The vehicle/trailer combination could even overturn. There is a risk of an accident. On no account should you attempt to straighten out the vehicle/trailer combination by increasing speed. Decrease your speed and do not countersteer. Brake if necessary. G WARNING If the maximum the permissible load for a carrier system is exceeded, the carrier could come loose from the vehicle and endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never exceed the permissible noseweight when using a carrier. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If you exceed the maximum permissible noseweight of the trailer drawbar on the ball coupling, the following may become damaged: Ryour vehicle trailer Rthe ball coupling RTrailer tow hitch The vehicle/trailer combination could become unstable. Rthe Towing a trailer Rmake sure to check the noseweight before each journey. Ruse a drawbar noseweight as close as possible to the maximum noseweight. Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible noseweight. Rdo not use a noseweight lower than the minimum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight. When reversing the vehicle towards the trailer, make sure there is nobody between the trailer and the vehicle. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached. Make sure that the following values are not exceeded: Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight Rthe permissible trailer load Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer You will find the applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, in the vehicle documents. You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification plates and those for the towing vehicle under "Technical data" (Y page 410). When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison to when driving without a trailer. The vehicle/trailer combination: Rthe Ris heavier restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capability Ris Rhas an increased braking distance affected more by strong crosswinds Rdemands more sensitive steering Rhas a larger turning circle This can impair the vehicle's handling characteristics. Adapt your style of driving accordingly. Maintain a safe distance. Drive carefully. When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed to the current road and weather conditions. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle/trailer combination. Ris Notes on towing a trailer General notes i When towing a trailer, set the tyre pres- sure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle for a maximum load; see the tyre pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 367). Please note that when towing a trailer, PARKTRONIC (Y page 207), Active Parking Assist (Y page 210) and Blind Spot Assist (Y page 223) are only available with limitations, or not at all. i On vehicles without level control, the height of the ball coupling will alter according to the load placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar. You will find fitting dimensions and loads under "Technical data" (Y page 409). Driving tips i Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabilisation (Y page 75). The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the trailer's documents to see what the maximum permitted speed is. Observe the legally Z Driving and parking If the noseweight used is lower than the minimum permissible noseweight, the vehicle/ trailer combination could also become unstable. To avoid hazardous situations: 233 Towing a trailer Driving and parking 234 prescribed maximum speed in the relevant country. For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maximum permissible rear axle load is increased when towing a trailer. See "Technical data" to find out whether this applies to your vehicle (Y page 410). If you utilise any of the added maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison to when driving without a trailer and it will consume more fuel. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. i This also applies if you have activated cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DISTRONIC PLUS. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine, and consequently the vehicle's gradientclimbing capability, decrease with increasing altitude. Folding out the ball coupling G WARNING If the ball coupling is not correctly engaged, the trailer can detach. There is a risk of an accident. Always engage the ball coupling as described. G WARNING If you release the ball coupling or it does not engage correctly when folding in, it will swing out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, there is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in. Driving tips If the trailer swings from side to side: Do not accelerate. Do not countersteer. X Brake if necessary. X X RMaintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer. RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly. RThe values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea CLS Shooting Brake Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle, you must fold out the ball coupling. The release wheel is located behind the lefthand side trim panel in the boot/luggage compartment. To open the cover: X Turn handle : anti-clockwise and fold down cover ;. Towing a trailer 235 Coupling up a trailer Make sure that the transmission is in position P. X Apply the parking brake. X Position the trailer level behind the vehicle. X Couple up the trailer. X Establish the electric connection between the vehicle and the trailer. X Check that the trailer lighting system is working. A trailer that is connected is recognised only when the electrical connection is established correctly and when the lighting system is working properly. The function of other systems, such as ESP®, PARKTRONIC and Active Parking Assist also depends on this. CLS Shooting Brake To unlock and fold out the ball coupling: Grip release wheel ? so that your thumb lies on the thumb rest. X Turn release wheel ? anti-clockwise until the ball coupling releases and folds out from under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp = flashes. X Uncoupling a trailer G WARNING If you uncouple a trailer with an engaged overrun brake, you could trap your hand between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This poses a risk of injury. Do not uncouple a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Pull the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages in a vertical position. Indicator lamp = goes out. The multifunction display shows the Trailer hitch Check lock mech. message until the ball coupling is engaged. X Remove the protective covering from the ball coupling and store it in a safe place. X Make sure that the ball of the ball coupling is clean and greased. X The power socket is integrated in the ball coupling. G WARNING Vehicles with level control: If you disconnect the trailer cable, the vehicle is lowered. This can cause you or others to become trapped between the vehicle body and tyres, or underneath the vehicle. This poses a risk of injury. Make sure that no-one is in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arch or underneath the vehicle when disconnecting the trailer cable. ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun brake. Z Driving and parking X Towing a trailer 236 Make sure that the transmission is in position P. X Apply the parking brake. X Secure the trailer against rolling away. X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the trailer. Driving and parking X Folding in the ball coupling G WARNING If you release the ball coupling or it does not engage correctly when folding in, it will swing out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, there is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in. X To unlock and lower the ball coupling: X Grasp release wheel ? with your hand such that the thumb is in the thumb rest and turn it anti-clockwise. The ball coupling unlocks and lowers. Indicator lamp = flashes. X Press the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages behind the bumper. Indicator lamp = goes out and the message in the multifunction display disappears. Place the protective covering on the ball coupling. CLS Shooting Brake The release wheel is located behind the lefthand side trim panel in the boot/luggage compartment. To open the cover: X CLS Shooting Brake Turn handle : anti-clockwise and fold down cover ;. i Fold the ball coupling back in if you are not using the trailer tow hitch. Trailer power supply ! You can connect accessories with a power rating of up to 240 W to the permanent power supply and with a power rating of up to 180 W to the power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. Towing a trailer X To switch the connected power supply on or off: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or 0 respectively (Y page 159). When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's trailer socket is equipped with a permanent power supply and a power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 9. The power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin 10. The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle supply voltage and after six hours at the latest. You can find more information about installing the trailer electrics at a qualified specialist workshop. Bulb failure indicator for LED lamps Fitting the adapter ! Make sure that there is sufficient cable play so that the cable cannot become detached when cornering. Driving and parking The trailer battery may not be charged from the power supply. 237 Open the socket cover. Insert the plug connector with lug : into groove = on the socket. Turn bayonet connection ; clockwise to the stop. X Let the cover engage. X If you are using an adapter cable, secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties. X X i If LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, an error message may appear in the multifunction display even if there is no fault. The reason for the error message could be that the current has fallen below the minimum of 50 mA. To ensure reliable operation of the bulb failure indicator, each LED chain in the trailer lighting must be guaranteed a minimum current of 50 mA. Trailer with 7-pin connector General notes Trailer with 7-pin connector: you can connect to the 13-pin socket on the ball coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an adapter cable. Both can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 238 Useful information ............................ 240 Important safety notes .................... 240 Displays and operation .................... 240 Menus and submenus ...................... 243 Display messages ............................. 261 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................ 287 On-board computer and displays 239 On-board computer and displays 240 Displays and operation Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 26). Important safety notes G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognise function restrictions relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not operating safely may cause an accident. For an overview, see the instrument cluster illustration (Y page 32). Displays and operation Coolant temperature gauge G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the left-hand side (Y page 32). Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. At high outside temperatures and when driving uphill, the coolant temperature may rise to the end of the scale. Rev counter ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point. Displays and operation Operating the on-board computer On-board computer and displays The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 242). Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Overview Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. control activated (Y page 186): The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. RVariable SPEEDTRONIC activated (Y page 189): The segments light up from the start of the scale to the selected limit speed. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 191): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. RCruise : Multifunction display ; Right control panel = To switch on LINGUATRONIC; see the sep- arate operating instructions ? Back button A Left control panel X 241 To activate the on-board computer: turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Z On-board computer and displays 242 Displays and operation Left control panel = ; RCalls 9 : Press briefly: 9 : a up the menu and menu bar RScrolls through lists RSelects a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number W X RAdjusts 8 RMute Back button % the Audio menu: selects the previous/next station or selects an audio track or a video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open Press briefly: RBack RSwitches off LINGUATRONIC; see the separate operating instructions RHides display messages/calls up the last Trip menu function used RExits the telephone book/redial memory Press and hold: RIn the volume % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Multifunction display RConfirms selection/display mes- sage the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialling the selected number RIn the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station RIn Right control panel ~ RRejects or ends a call telephone book/redial memory RExits 6 RMakes or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches : ; = ? A X Text field Menu bar Drive program (Y page 169) Transmission position (Y page 169) Permanent display: outside temperature or speed (Y page 252) To show menu bar ;: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. Menu bar ; disappears after a few seconds. Text field : shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages. The following messages may appear in the multifunction display: Z Gearshift recommendation, when shifting manually (Y page 174) XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 210) ¯ Cruise control (Y page 186) È SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 189) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 129) ¤ ECO start/stop function (Y page 163) ë HOLD function (Y page 200) 120 km/h! Maximum permissible speed exceeded (only for certain countries) given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND Online. Trip menu Standard display X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip meter : and total distance recorder ; is shown. Trip computer "From start" or "From reset" Menus and submenus Menu overview Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 241). Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus: RTrip menu (Y page 243) menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 245) RAudio menu (Y page 246) RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 247) RAssist. menu (assistance) (Y page 249) RServ. menu (Y page 251) RSettings menu (settings) (Y page 251) RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 258) The Audio Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly in vehicles with an audio system and in vehicles with COMAND Online. The examples RNavi Example: "From start" trip computer : Distance ; Time = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select From start or From reset. reset X The values in the From start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the From reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 244). The From start trip computer is automatically reset if: Z 243 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 244 Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours R999 hours have been exceeded R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded. The From reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres. there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the range. Digital speedometer ECO display Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer. X Example: ECO display Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO DISPLAY. DISPLAY X If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset. For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 182). Observe the information on gearshift recommendations Z for manual shifting (Y page 174). Gearshift recommendation is not given on AMG vehicles. Resetting values Displaying the range and current fuel consumption Example: resetting the "From start" trip computer Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press the a button. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the current fuel consumption (not for AMG vehicles) and the approximate range. X The approximate range that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If You can reset the values of the following functions: RTrip meter start" trip computer R"From reset" trip computer RECO display R"From i If you reset the values in the "ECO dis- play", the values in the "From start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From start" trip computer, the values in the "ECO display" are also reset. = Current road ? Symbol indicating "follow the road's course" Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation Navigation menu Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. For more information on navigation, see the separate operating instructions. Becker® Switch on the audio system with MAP PILOT or COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. X Route guidance not active : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is announced, you will see change-of-direction symbol = and distance graphic ;. This shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation : Direction of travel ; Current road Activating route guidance No change of direction announced : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction ? Lanes not recommended A Possible lane B Change-of-direction symbol : Distance to the destination ; Distance to the next change of direction On multilane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. Z 245 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 246 Menus and submenus During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Recommended lane =: in this lane, you will be able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lane. Lane not recommended ?: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Possible lane A: in this lane, you will only be able to complete the next change of direction without changing lane. Other status indicators of the navigation system RO: you have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. RNew route... or Calculating route: route calculating a new route ROff map or Off road: road the vehicle position is outside the area of the digital map (offmap position) RNo route: route no route could be calculated to the selected destination. Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online and select Radio, see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a stored station: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a station from the station list: press and hold the 9 or : button. If no station list is received: X To select a station using the station search: press and hold the 9 or : button. X i For information on switching wavebands and storing stations, see the separate operating instructions. i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcasting); seethe separate operating instructions. Audio player or audio media operation Audio menu Selecting a radio station Example: CD/DVD changer display Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle. Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online and select audio CD, audio DVD or MP3 mode, see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired track : has been reached. X : Waveband ; Station frequency with memory position i Station ; is displayed with the station frequency or station name. The memory position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. If you press and hold the 9 or : button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio devices or media support this function. If track information is stored on the audio player or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and title of the track. The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). Video DVD operation Switch on COMAND Online and select TV, see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a stored channel: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a channel from the channel list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button. X i Storing a TV channel; see the separate operating instructions. i Depending on the digital TV broadcaster, radio stations can also be received. The multifunction display shows TV (RADIO). (RADIO) Telephone menu Example: CD/DVD changer display Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online and select video DVD, see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired scene : has been reached. X TV operation Introduction G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone; see the separate operating instructions. X Switch on the audio system or COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. i The memory position is only displayed along with channel : if this has been stored. Z 247 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 248 X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket (Y page 319). or Establish a Bluetooth® connection to COMAND Online, see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RPlease enter PIN: the mobile phone has been placed in the mobile phone bracket and the PIN has not been entered. When you enter your PIN via the mobile phone, LINGUATRONIC, the audio system or COMAND Online, the mobile phone searches for a network. RTelephone ready or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RTelephone No service: service there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. i You can obtain further information about suitable mobile phones and connecting mobile phones via Bluetooth®: Rfrom any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre the Internet at http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Ron Accepting a call Example: incoming call X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. If someone calls you when you are in the Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call even if you are not in the Tel menu. Rejecting or ending a call X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel. You can end or reject a call even if you are not in the Tel menu. Dialling an entry from the phone book Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to switch to the phone book. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. or X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the 9 or : button for longer than one second. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X To exit the telephone book: press the ~ or % button. X Redialling Showing the assistance graphic The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialled in the redial memory. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ or % button. X Assistance menu Introduction In the Assist. menu, you have the following options: RShowing the assistance graphic (Y page 249) RActivating/deactivating the Speed Limit Assist message function (Y page 249) RActivating/deactivating ESP® (Y page 250) RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 250) RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 250) RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 250) RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 251) Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Assist. graphic. graphic X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the assistance graphic. X The assistance graphic shows you the status of and/or information from the following driving systems or driving safety systems: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 197) RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 218) RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 225) RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 229) RSpeed Limit Assist (Y page 219) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 76) Speed Limit Assist Activating/deactivating the Speed Limit Assist message function X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Speed Limit Assist X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate or deactivate: press a. If the Speed Limit Assist message function is activated, a detected speed limit is automatically displayed for five seconds. Other Z 249 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 250 Menus and submenus items in the multifunction display are not shown during this time. Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake Deactivating/activating ESP® PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- X tion in the description of ESP® (Y page 73). G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Deactivating/activating ESP® on AMG vehicles (Y page 74). Further information about ESP® (Y page 72) X Start the engine. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ESP. ESP X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 291). Observe the information on display messages (Y page 262). Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select PRE-SAFE Brake. Brake X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the assistance graphic shows the æ symbol in the multifunction display. For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake, see (Y page 76). Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Attention Assist. Assist X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. X When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 218). Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Blind Spot Assist. Assist X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. X If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors deac‐ tivated or Act. B. Spot Assist Sen‐ sors deactivated message appears, the radar sensor system is deactivated. X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 255). Further information about Blind Spot Assist (Y page 223). Further information about Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 227). Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Lane Keep. Assist X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off, Standard or Adaptive Adaptive. X Press the a button to save the setting. When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction display shows the lane markings as bright lines in the assistance graphic. X For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 225). For further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 229). Service menu In the Serv. menu, you have the following options: RCalling up display messages in the message memory (Y page 261) RRestarting the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 369) RChecking the tyre pressure electronically (Y page 370) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 333) Settings menu Introduction In the Settings menu, you have the following options: RChanging the instrument cluster settings (Y page 252) RChanging the light settings (Y page 252) RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 255) RChanging the auxiliary heating settings (Y page 256) RChanging the convenience settings (Y page 257) RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 258) Z 251 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 252 Instrument cluster Selecting the unit of measurement for distance The Display unit Speed-/odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometres or miles in the multifunction display. You can determine whether the multifunction display shows some messages in miles or kilometres. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Display unit Speed-/odometer function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles. miles X Press the a button to save the setting. X The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Rdigital speedometer in the Trip menu distance recorder and the trip meter Rtrip computer Rcurrent consumption and the range Rnavigation instructions in the Navi menu Rcruise control RSPEEDTRONIC RDISTRONIC PLUS RASSYST PLUS service interval display Rtotal Selecting the permanent display function Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this function is unavailable. You can determine whether the multifunction display permanently shows your speed or the outside temperature. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Permanent display: function. You will see the selected setting: outside temperature or Addit. speedo [mph]. [mph] X Press the a button to save the setting. X i The speed is displayed in mph. Lights Setting the brightness for the instrument cluster lighting and switches The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted with the Brightness Display/switches: function. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Brightness Display/switches: function. You will see the selected setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the brightness to any level from Level 1 to Level 5 (bright). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. If the light switch is set to Ã, T or L, the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light. i The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated. Switching the daytime driving lights on/off The Day lights function can only be switched on with the engine turned off. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Day lights function. If the Day lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Further information on daytime driving lights (Y page 123). Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Intell. Light Sys. function. If the Intell. Light Sys. function has been switched on, the cone of light and the L symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. When you activate Intell. Light Sys., Sys. you activate the following functions: RMotorway mode RActive light function RCornering light function RExtended range foglamps If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, the multifunction display shows the Intell. Light System: System inoperative Inactive for left-side traffic or Intell. Light System: System inoperative Inactive for right-side traffic display message instead of the Intell. Light Sys. function in the Light submenu (Y page 253). Further information on the Intelligent Light System (Y page 127). Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/right X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Dipped beams Setting for: function. You will see the selected setting: Rightside traffic or Left-side traffic. traffic X Press the a button to save the setting. If you change the setting, conversion does not take place until the next time the vehicle is stationary. This function is only available on vehicles with the Intelligent Light System. You can use this function to switch between symmetrical and asymmetrical dipped beam (Y page 122). If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the right/left, then motorway mode and the extended range foglamps are unavailable. A qualified specialist workshop can set the dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the left/right. Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. Z 253 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 254 Press the : or 9 button to select the Amb. light +/- function. You will see the selected setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the brightness to any level from Off to Level 5 (bright). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. X Setting the ambient lighting colour X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Amb. light col. function. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set the colour to SOLAR SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR POLAR. X Press the a or % button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switch-off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Surround lighting function. If the Surround lighting function is activated, the light cone and the area around the vehicle are displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily: Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deactivated. X Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is reactivated the next time you start the engine. If you have activated the Surround light‐ ing function and the light switch is set to Ã, the following functions are activated when it is dark: Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking with the key. If you start the engine, the surround lighting is switched off and automatic headlamp mode is activated (Y page 123). Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds after the engine is switched off. If you close all the doors and the boot lid/tailgate, the exterior lighting goes off after 5 seconds. i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, when the surround lighting and delayed switch-off exterior lighting are on, the following light up: Rside lamps Rdipped-beam headlamps Rdaytime driving lights Rsurround lighting in the exterior mirrors Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off If you activate the Light. delay Switch off function, the interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds after you remove the key from the ignition lock. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light. delay function. If the Light. delay function has been switched on, the vehicle interior is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Vehicle Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Limit speed (winter tyres): function. You will see the current setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust permanent SPEEDTRONIC in increments of ten (230 230 km/h to 160 km/h). km/h The Off setting switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC off. X Press the a button to store the entry. For further information on permanent SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 191). Switching the automatic locking feature on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. door locks function. When the Auto. door locks function is switched on, the vehicle doors are dis- played in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. If you activate the Auto. door locks function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of around 15 km/h. Further information on the automatic locking feature (Y page 90). Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking confirmation If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction display lights up orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the radar sensor system X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select Radar sensor (See Owner's Man.):. Man.): You will see the selected setting: on or off off. X Press the a button to save the setting. The following systems are switched off when the radar sensor system is deactivated: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 191) PLUS (Y page 71) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 76) RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 223) RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 227) RBAS Z 255 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 256 Menus and submenus Heating Auxiliary heating departure time G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust fumes can enter the vehicle, especially carbon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. in enclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck in snow. There is a risk of fatal injuries. You should switch off the auxiliary heating in enclosed spaces which do not have an extraction system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliary heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and the area around the vehicle clear of snow. To guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle away from the wind. G WARNING When the auxiliary heating is switched on, parts of the vehicle can become very hot. Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with: Rhot parts of the exhaust system exhaust gas itself There is a risk of fire. When the auxiliary heating is switched on, make sure that: Rthe Rno flammable materials come into contact with hot vehicle components Rthe exhaust gas can escape from the exhaust pipe unhindered Rthe exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials. ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila- tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. Only vehicles with auxiliary heating have this function (Y page 150). In the Heating submenu, you can select a stored departure time or change a departure time. The auxiliary heating timer function calculates the switch-on time according to the outside temperature so that the vehicle is preheated by the departure time. When the departure time is reached, the auxiliary heating continues to heat for a further five minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary heating adopts the THERMATIC or THERMOTRONIC temperature setting. You can switch off the auxiliary heating by using the remote control or the auxiliary heating button on the centre console. i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about ten minutes. Selecting the departure time or deactivating a selected departure time X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press a to confirm. You will see the selected setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select one of the three departure times or Timer off (no timer active). X Press a to confirm. If a departure time is selected, the yellow indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary heating button. Changing the departure time X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press a to confirm. You will see the selected setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select A, B or Change C. C Press a to confirm. You can now change the departure time. X Press the = or ; button to select the display to be changed: hours, minutes. X Press the : or 9 button to set the selected display. X Press the a button to store the entry. The yellow indicator lamp on the auxiliary heating button lights up. X Comfort Activating/deactivating the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. If someone is trapped: Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving. The adjustment process is stopped. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Easy Entry/Exit: function. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Switching belt adjustment on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Belt adjustment function. If the Belt adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is shown in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. For further information on belt adjustment, see (Y page 47). Switching the fold-in mirrors when locking function on/off This function is only available on vehicles with a memory function (Y page 119). When you switch on the Auto. fold in function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. When you unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. fold in function. If the Auto. fold in function is switched on, the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 115). Z 257 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 258 AMG menu in AMG vehicles AMG displays If you have switched on the Auto. fold in function and you fold the exterior mirrors in using button : on the door, they will not fold out automatically (Y page 117). You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors using button :. : ; = ? A B Resetting to factory settings X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory setting submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset all settings? message appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes Yes. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. X For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: the Limit speed (winter tyres) function in permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be set in the Vehicle submenu. If you want to reset the Day lights in the Light submenu, you must turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. Digital speedometer Gear indicator Upshift indicator Engine oil temperature Coolant temperature Status indicator for ECO start/stop function (Y page 163) Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual drive program. Upshift indicator UP = fades out other messages until you have shifted up. If the engine oil temperature is below 80 †, the oil temperature is shown in blue. Avoid using the full output of the engine during this time. SETUP : Drive program (C C/SS+ SS+/MM) ; ESP® mode (ON ON/OFF OFF) or SPORT handling mode (SPORT SPORT) = Suspension setting (COMFORT COMFORT/SPORT SPORT/ SPORT+) SPORT+ SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode and the suspension setting. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed. or X Briefly press the AMG button on the centre console (Y page 205). X Press the = or ; button to select Interm. Time. Time X Press a to confirm. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X Starting a new lap RACETIMER Displaying and starting the RACETIMER : RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap X Press a to confirm New Lap. Lap i A maximum of 16 laps may be stored. The : Lap ; RACETIMER 16th lap can only be completed with Fin‐ ish Lap. Lap Stopping the RACETIMER The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads. You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown. X To start: press the a button to start the RACETIMER. X Displaying the intermediate time Press the % button on the steering wheel. X Confirm Yes with a. X The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the key to position 2 or 3 and then press a to confirm Start Start, timing is continued. Resetting the current lap X Stop the RACETIMER. X Press the = or ; button to select Reset Lap. Lap X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". Z 259 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 260 Deleting all laps Lap evaluation If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted. You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Press a to confirm Reset Reset. Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. : ; = ? A Overall evaluation : ; = ? A RACETIMER overall evaluation Total time driven Average speed Distance covered Maximum speed This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown. X Lap Lap time Average lap speed Lap length Top speed during lap This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. X Display messages Introduction General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 200) page 180) RParking (Y Hiding display messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, messages for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages. messages X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. X Z 261 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 262 Display messages Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist System), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes: currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Rself-diagnosis Rthe is not yet complete on-board voltage may be insufficient G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X !÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are unavailable due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function, for example, may not be complete. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. inoperative See Owner's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Z 263 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 264 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions T! ÷ EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRESAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are unavailable due to a malfunction. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. inoperative See Owner's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. J You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also sounds. X Release the parking brake. J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the red J warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. Release parking brake Check brake fluid level G WARNING Braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 180). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the fault. # Check brake pad wear The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. PRE-SAFE Functions cur‐ rently limited See Owner's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers are dirty Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. PRE‑SAFE® Brake is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rthe Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 180). X Clean the sensors in the radiator grille and the bumper (Y page 337). X Restart the engine. X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 74). X PRE-SAFE Functions limited See Owner's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a fault. BAS PLUS or the distance warning signal may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ü If this symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has been inserted into a rear seat belt buckle. Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts (Y page 47). Z 265 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 266 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ý If this symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has not been inserted in a rear seat belt buckle. G WARNING A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide the intended level of protection. This poses an increased risk of injury. X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts (Y page 46). Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts (Y page 47). 6 The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Restraint sys. mal‐ G WARNING function Consult workshop The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42). 6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clusFront left malfunc‐ ter. tion Consult work‐ G WARNING shop or Front right malfunction The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintenConsult workshop tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 Rear left malfunc‐ tion Consult work‐ shop or Rear right malfunction Con‐ sult workshop The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear centre. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Rear centre mal‐ function Consult workshop G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand windowbag. Left windowbag mal‐ The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. function Consult G WARNING workshop or Right windowbag malfunc‐ The left or right windowbag may either be triggered unintentionally tion Consult work‐ or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. shop This poses an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Lights i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appear if all the LEDs have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the trailer manufacturer. Left cornering light or Right cor‐ nering light Left dipped beam or Right dipped beam Trailer left tail lamp or Trailer right tail lamp Z 267 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 268 Display messages Display messages b Trailer left turn signal or Trailer right turn signal b Trailer brake lamp b Rear left turn sig‐ nal or Rear right turn signal b Front left turn signal or Front right turn signal b Left mirror turn signal or Right mirror turn signal b Third brake lamp b Left-hand tail lamp/brake lamp or Right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp b Left main beam or Right main beam b Left licence plate lamp or Right licence plate lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty. Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the trailer manufacturer. X The trailer brake lamp is faulty. X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the trailer manufacturer. The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The third brake lamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand main-beam headlamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The left or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages b Rear fog lamp b Front left parking lamp or Front right parking lamp b Left revers. lamp or Right revers. lamp b Left daytime driv‐ ing lamp or Right daytime driving lamp b Intell. Light Sys‐ tem inoperative b Malfunction See Owner's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear foglamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 132). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The left-hand or right-hand daytime driving lamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available without the Intelligent Light System. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The exterior lighting is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown. Check the fuses (Y page 360). X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes as you do so. X If the display message continues to be displayed: X b AUTO lights inoper‐ ative b Switch off lights Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The light sensor is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to Ã. Z 269 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 270 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Adaptive Main-beam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog X Clean the windscreen. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Adaptive Main-beam Assist inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Top up coolant See Owner's Manual ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 331). X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X ? The fan motor is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Stop vehi‐ cle Switch engine off G WARNING Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. There is a risk of injury. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. # See Owner's Manual The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Rfaulty alternator poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Rtorn ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 180). Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 271 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 272 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 180). X Observe the instructions in the # See Owner's Manual display message. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # The engine is switched off and the battery charge level is too low. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window heating and interior lighting. X Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive for a longer distance. The battery charges. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest (Y page 329). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 330). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual Start engine See Owner's Manual Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. 4 AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low. X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest Add 1 litre engine (Y page 329). oil when next refu‐ X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 330). elling X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. 8 Reserve fuel level The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level drops into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions C There is very little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be operated. X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail. ¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Please replace air filter ! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off. Clean the fuel fil‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ter ¯ Refill AdBlue at workshop See Own‐ er's Manual ¯ Refill AdBlue at workshop No start in .. km The AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range. A warning tone also sounds. X Have AdBlue® refilled as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. The AdBlue® level is only sufficient for the indicated distance. A warning tone also sounds. X Have AdBlue® refilled as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. ¯ The AdBlue® tank is empty. A warning tone also sounds. You can no longer start the engine. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ¯ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Refill AdBlue at workshop Eng. start not possible Check AdBlue See Owner's Manual ¯ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. Eng. start not pos‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. sible in .. km ¯ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. You can no longer start the engine. Eng. start not pos‐ X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. sible Z 273 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 274 Display messages Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. Attention Assist: Take a break! During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that you get enough rest. À Attention Assist inoperative ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X ¨or° Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. ¨or° The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not pull away. The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears. ¨or° You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low. AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Vehicle rising Vehicle rising Please wait Stop vehicle Vehi‐ cle too low AIRMATIC is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h. X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front wings or the tyres could be damaged if the steering movement is too great. X Listen for scraping sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level. Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehicle. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ¨or° The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Speed Limit Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Malfunction Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog X Clean the windscreen. Rvisibility If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Speed Limit Assist is operational again. Speed Limit Assist inoperative Speed Limit Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 200). Radar sensor deac‐ tivated See Own‐ er's Manual The radar sensor system is deactivated. X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 255). Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual or Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist cur‐ rently unavailable See Owner's Manual Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: off Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rvisibility Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Clean the windscreen. X Z 275 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 276 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lane Keeping Assist inopera‐ tive or Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual or Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ able See Owner's Manual Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: Rthe sensors are dirty function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rthe Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 180). X Clean the sensors (Y page 337). X Restart the engine. X Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while towing a trailer. You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle. X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message. Blind Spot Assist inoperative or Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Park Assist cancel‐ The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. led X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed. You inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure not to touch the multifunction steering wheel. The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 210). Park Assist inoper‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking manoeuvres. ative Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 210). X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. PARKTRONIC is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist switched off The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. DISTRONIC PLUS off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 191). If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS available again DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 191). Z 277 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 278 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. rently unavailable Possible causes: See Owner's Manual Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers are dirty Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low A warning tone also sounds. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. DISTRONIC is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 180). X Clean the sensors in the radiator grille and the bumper (Y page 337). X Restart the engine. X DISTRONIC PLUS inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. The following may have also failed: RBAS PLUS RPRE-SAFE® Brake A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. pended X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS - - - km/h DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC inop‐ erative An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 191). X DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC inop‐ erative SPEEDTRONIC and cruise control are malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Limit --- km/h While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. Cruise control - - - km/h A condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 186). 120 km/h Maximum speed exceeded Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been exceeded. In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h! X Drive more slowly. Z 279 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 280 Display messages Tyres Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre pressure Check tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tyres or fitted new wheels and tyres tyre pressure in one or more tyres is not correct Rthe G WARNING Underinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 180). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 347). X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 369). Check tyre pres‐ sures then restart Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 369). Run Flat Indicator inoperative X Rectify tyre pressure The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 370). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 372). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING Underinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 180). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 347). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 370). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Warning tyre defect The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle could lose control of the vehicle Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 180). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 347). Ryou Z 281 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 282 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre press. monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received currently unavail‐ from the wheel sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. able X Drive on. The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. Wheel sensor(s) missing There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre press. moni‐ tor inoperative No wheel sensors The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is deactivated. X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Tyre press. monitor The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. Risk of vehicle rolling Transmission not in P The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Depress the brake pedal. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Without changing gear, consult workshop You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary N A Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The vehicle is moving. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. CLS Coupé: the boot lid is open. Close the boot lid. X CLS Shooting Brake: the tailgate is open. G WARNING When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open. There is a risk of poisoning. X Close the tailgate. Mor? The bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 180). X Close the bonnet. C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors. Z 283 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 284 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions _ The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds. X Push the backrest back until it engages. _ The driver's or front-passenger seat backrest is not engaged. A warning tone also sounds. X Push the backrest back until it engages. j The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Apply the parking brake. X Engage the trailer coupling's ball coupling in the end position (Y page 234). & The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switched itself off or cannot be switched on (Y page 150). X Drive for a considerable distance. The battery charges. The auxiliary heating is operational again as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient. & There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on (Y page 150). X Refuel at the nearest filling station. Rear left seat backrest not locked or Rear right seat back‐ rest not locked Front left seat backrest not locked or Front right seat back‐ rest not locked Check trailer hitch lock inoperative Bat‐ tery low inoperative Refuel vehicle & inoperative See Owner's Man. The auxiliary heating has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heating, waiting several minutes between each attempt (Y page 150). X If the auxiliary heating does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð The power steering assistance is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. Telephone No ser‐ vice Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. Power steering mal‐ G WARNING function See Own‐ er's Manual You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. Top up washer fluid X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 332). Key Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. X Use the correct key. Key does not belong to vehicle  Replace key  Change key batter‐ ies The key needs to be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged. X Replace the batteries (Y page 86). Z 285 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 286 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. Key not detected (red display message) The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.  Key not detected (white display message) The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle. If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected: X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.  The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during locking. X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle. X Lock the vehicle again.  Remove starting button, then insert key The KEYLESS-GO key is not continually detected. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.  At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again. Key still in vehi‐ cle Close doors to lock vehicle Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Safety Seat belts Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger Only for certain coun- to fasten their seat belts. tries: the red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds after the engine starts. ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened. Only for certain coun- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). tries: the red seat belt The warning tone ceases. warning lamp lights up after the engine starts. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. ü The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). ing lamp lights up after The warning lamp goes out. the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat. the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow door is closed. them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. ü The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the The red seat belt warn- same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly ing lamp flashes and an driven faster than 25 km/h. intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Z 287 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 288 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Safety systems Problem J The yellow brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G WARNING The brake system is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. J You are driving with the parking brake applied. The red brake system X Release the parking brake. warning lamp comes on The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds. J G WARNING The red brake system The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking charwarning lamp is lit while acteristics may be affected. the engine is running. A There is a risk of an accident. warning tone also X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. The red brake system G WARNING warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A Braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not rectify the fault. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) has been deactivated due to a fault. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist System), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation and the adaptive brake lights, for example, are also deactivated. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will be unavailable. Z 289 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 290 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation and the adaptive brake lights, for example, are also deactivated. Possible causes: Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete on-board voltage may be insufficient ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Rthe G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. EBD is unavailable due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation and the adaptive brake lights, for example, are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. J÷å! The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP® are unavailable due to a fault. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation and the adaptive brake lights, for example, are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock, for example, if you brake hard. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 291 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 292 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. the vehicle is in motion. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 73). å ESP® is deactivated. ® The yellow ESP OFF G WARNING warning lamp is lit while ® ® the engine is running. If ESP is deactivated, ESP is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. Reactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 73). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. M AMG vehicles only: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. SPORT handling mode is activated. G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions written in the "Activating/deactivating SPORT handling mode" section (Y page 74). Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation and the adaptive brake lights are unavailable due to a fault. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 293 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 294 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷å The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X 6 The restraint system is faulty. The red restraint sysG WARNING tem warning lamp is lit while the engine is run- The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. ning. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42). Engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; There may be a fault, for example: The yellow engine diag- Rin the engine management nostics warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system lights up while the Rin the exhaust system engine is running. Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines) Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 180). X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked. 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The yellow reserve fuel Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level warning lamp is on drops into the reserve range. while the engine is run- X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ning. ? The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is faulty. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 180). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 295 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 296 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 180). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 331). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. ? The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 180). Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 331). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. Driving systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed The red distance warn- selected. ing lamp lights up while X Increase the distance. the vehicle is in motion. · You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line The red distance warn- of travel at too high a speed. ing lamp lights up while X Be prepared to brake immediately. the vehicle is in motion. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to A warning tone also brake or take evasive action. sounds. Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 76). Z 297 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 298 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Tyres Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit. The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tyres. G WARNING With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 347). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 370). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. h The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 299 Useful information ............................ 300 Stowage areas .................................. 300 Stowing and features Features ............................................. 313 300 Stowage areas Useful information Stowing and features i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 26). Stowage areas Loading guidelines G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid/tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid/tailgate. Never drive with the boot lid/tailgate open. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: Rnever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). Rthe boot/luggage compartment is the preferred place to store objects. Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the boot/luggage compartment as possible. Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. Ralways place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place. Ralways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. Ruse the lashing eyelets and the luggage nets to transport loads and luggage. Ronly use lashing eyelets and fastening components that are suitable for the weight and size of the load. Rwhen transporting objects in the luggage compartment, the combined luggage cover and net must always be installed (luggage compartment cover and safety net). Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant lashing material. Pad sharp edges for protection. i Load restraints are available at any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Stowage spaces Important safety notes G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces while driving. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/luggage compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300). Glove compartment The glove compartment can only be locked and unlocked using the emergency key element. X To lock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2. X To unlock: insert the emergency key element into the lock and turn it 90° anticlockwise to position 1. Spectacles compartment To open: pull handle : and open glove compartment flap ;. X To close: fold glove compartment flap ; upwards until it engages. X i The glove compartment can be ventilated (Y page 155). There is a compartment to stow spectacles in the roof lining on the driver's side. X To open: pull down spectacles compartment : by the handle. Z 301 Stowing and features Stowage areas Stowage areas 302 Stowing and features Stowage compartments in the centre console AMG vehicles X Front stowage compartment (all models except AMG vehicles) To open: slide the cover forwards by handle : in the direction of the arrow until it engages. X To close: briefly press the front of handle :. X Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest X Rear stowage compartment (all models except AMG vehicles) X Briefly press trim ; in the direction of the arrow. Cover : swings upwards. Briefly press trim :. i The stowage tray can be removed. To open: pull handle : up. The armrest folds out. i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a 12 V power socket, USB port or a Media Interface is installed in the stowage compartment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for portable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player (see the separate Audio 20 or COMAND Online operating instructions). Stowage compartment under the front seats G WARNING If you exceed the maximum permitted load of the stowage compartment, the cover is unable to restrain the objects. Objects may be Stowage areas thrown out of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always observe the maximum load of the stowage compartment. Stow and secure heavy objects in the boot/luggage compartment. Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest Stowing and features The maximum permissible load of the stowage compartment is 1.5 kg. Illustration: CLS Coupé X X To open: fold down seat armrest ;. Fold cover : of the armrest upwards. Stowage nets X To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ; forwards. i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher, the fire extinguisher is located in the stowage compartment under the driver's seat. Stowage compartments in the rear centre console (CLS Coupé) Stowage nets are located in the frontpassenger footwell and on the left-hand side of the boot (Coupé) or left- and right-hand sides of the luggage compartment (Shooting Brake). Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 300). Through-loading facility in the rear bench seat Important safety notes G WARNING X To open: slide covers : and ; in the direction of the arrow. i There is a 12 V power socket in the front stowage compartment. 303 If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. RObjects or loads in the boot cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. Z Stowage areas 304 Stowing and features This poses an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300). The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded down separately to increase the boot capacity. X X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards. Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. Folding back the seat backrest ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. Folding the seat backrest forwards Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it engages. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X i Vehicles with memory function: when you fold one or both parts of the rear seat backrest forwards, the respective front seat moves forward slightly, when necessary, in order to avoid contact. Vehicles without memory function: if necessary, move the driver's or frontpassenger seat forwards. X Open the boot. X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest release handle :. The corresponding rear seat backrest is released. X i If you do not need the through-loading feature, you should always engage the rear seat backrests. This will prevent unauthorised access to the boot from the vehicle interior. Through-loading facility in the rear bench seat (CLS Shooting Brake) Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold for- Stowage areas Vehicles without memory function: if necessary, move the driver's or frontpassenger seat forwards. X Pull the left-hand or right-hand release handle at the rear in load compartment :. The corresponding backrest folds forwards. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Folding back the seat backrest ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 300). Folding the seat backrest forwards ! When folding the rear seat backrest for- wards, ensure that there are no items lying on the seat cushions. These items could otherwise be damaged or could themselves damage the rear seats. Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. X Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 108). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded forwards separately to increase the luggage compartment capacity. i When you fold one or both parts of the rear seat backrests forwards, the headrests are also lowered if necessary. In the case of vehicles with memory function, the respective front seat is moved forwards slightly to avoid contact with the seat behind it. Z Stowing and features wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. RObjects or loads in the boot/luggage compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. This poses an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip. 305 306 Stowage areas Securing a load Coat hook (CLS Shooting Brake) Lashing eyelets General notes Observe the following notes on securing loads: Stowing and features RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 300). RSecure the load using the lashing eyelets. RDistribute the load on the lashing eyelets evenly. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load. These are only intended as an antislip protection for light loads. RDo not route lashing materials across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. : Coat hook Luggage compartment cover (CLS Shooting Brake) Important safety notes Boot/luggage compartment G WARNING Lashing eyelets : (CLS Coupé) On its own, the luggage compartment cover cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the luggage compartment cover. ! When loading the vehicle, make sure that you do not stack the load in the luggage compartment higher than the lower edge of the side windows. Do not place heavy objects on top of the luggage compartment cover. The luggage compartment cover is located behind the rear bench seat backrest. Lashing eyelets : (CLS Shooting Brake) Stowage areas To fit: place luggage compartment cover : into anchorage ; on the right or left-hand side. X Push in the opposite end cap of luggage compartment cover : in the direction of the arrow and insert luggage compartment cover : into opposite anchorage ;. X Fitting/removing the luggage cover There is a luggage cover on the tailgate which can be removed and then installed again to ease loading and unloading. X To extend: pull luggage compartment cover : back by grab handle ; until it engages. X To retract: push the rear edge of luggage compartment cover : downward. Luggage compartment cover : automatically moves forward. Fitting/removing the luggage compartment cover To remove: press buttons : on luggage cover ; simultaneously and remove it in the direction of the arrow. X To install: insert luggage cover ; and push it in the opposite direction to the arrow until it engages. X Safety net (CLS Shooting Brake) Important safety notes To remove: make sure that the luggage compartment cover is rolled up. X Push in the end cap of luggage compartment cover : in the direction of the arrow on the right or left side using grip =. X Push luggage compartment cover : into opposite anchorage ;. X Remove luggage compartment cover : upwards. X G WARNING On its own, the safety net cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by Z Stowing and features Extending and retracting the luggage compartment cover 307 Stowage areas 308 Stowing and features using lashing material, even if you are using the safety net. It is important to use a safety net if you load the vehicle with small objects above the seat backrests. For safety reasons, always use a safety net when transporting a load. The safety net is located in the stowage space under the luggage compartment floor (Y page 311). X Open both Velcro fasteners and remove the safety net. X Unroll and unfold the safety net. The joints on the upper and lower guide rod should engage audibly. The corresponding lashing eyelets for tightening the safety net are in the luggage compartment in front of the rear bench seat (Y page 306). Attaching and tightening the safety net Remove spring hook = from the lashing eyelet or bracket (vehicles with EASY-PACK load-securing kit (Y page 310)). X Detach guide rod : from bracket ;. X To stow: press the red button on the upper and lower guide rod. X Fold the safety net and roll it up. X Close the two Velcro fasteners on the safety net holder. X EASY-PACK boot box (CLS Coupé) Important safety notes G WARNING When the load surface moves up, your hands may become trapped on the frame of the EASY-PACK boot box. There is a risk of injury. When the load surface moves up, make sure that your hands are not within the sweep of the load surface. If someone becomes trapped, carefully push the centre of the load surface downward. ! When the EASY-PACK convenience box is pulled out, no objects may be placed on the frame of the box or pushed onto the frame from above. Otherwise, the box could be damaged. ! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects To attach and tighten: insert guide rod : into bracket ;. X Attach spring hook = to the lashing eyelet or bracket (vehicles wit EASY-PACK loadsecuring kit (Y page 310)) and pull down on the loose end of the lashing strap until the safety net is taut. X After driving a short distance, check the tension of the safety net and retighten it if necessary. X To loosen and detach: pull belt clamp ? up to reduce the tension in the lashing strap. X can damage the EASY-PACK boot box and then be thrown out. There is a risk of injury. Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects in the EASY-PACK boot box. Always store and secure these or similar objects in the boot outside of the EASYPACK boot box. ! If you exceed the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK boot box, objects can be thrown out of the EASY-PACK boot box and strike vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Stowage areas Removing and fitting The maximum permitted load of the EASYPACK boot box is 10 kg. With a load of above approximately 5 kg, the bottom of the box moves downward until it rests on the mat of the boot floor. Thus, overloading of the box is avoided. Adjusting the height to any position X Pull the box out by handle : in the direction of the arrow all the way to the stop. X To lower the load surface: push the centre of load surface ; down by hand in the direction of the arrow until load surface ; has reached the desired position and the box is the desired size. X To raise the load surface: press switch =. Load surface ; of the box moves up automatically. X To stow the box: push the box in by handle : all the way to the stop. To install: insert retainer ; of box : into slots =. X Raise box : and press hooks A into anchorage ? as far as they will go. X Turn left-hand rotating catch B clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B anti-clockwise by 90°. X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch B anti-clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B clockwise by 90°. X Move box : downwards and pull it out from anchorages ?. X i Store the EASY-PACK boot box on a flat surface after removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf. Z Stowing and features Always observe the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK boot box. Always store and secure heavy objects in the boot outside of the EASY-PACK boot box. 309 Stowage areas 310 EASY-PACK load-securing kit (CLS Shooting Brake) safely and securely retained by the luggage holder. Stowing and features Components and storage The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you to use your luggage compartment for a variety of purposes. The following accessory parts are located under the luggage compartment floor: Rtelescopic rod (on the underside of the luggage compartment floor) Rbag containing the brackets and luggage holder (below the luggage compartment floor or in one of the side stowage nets in the luggage compartment) Inserting the brackets into the loading rail Insert bracket : into the centre of loading rail ?. X Press release button ; and push bracket : into the desired position in loading rail ?. X Let go of release button ;. X Press locking button =. Bracket : is locked in loading rail ?. X If necessary, fold lashing eyelet A upwards. X Luggage holder ! Only use the luggage holder to secure loads with a maximum weight of 7 kg and with dimensions that allow the loads to be The luggage holder can be used to secure light loads against the side wall of the luggage compartment to prevent them from moving around. X To install: insert two brackets A into the left or right loading rail (Y page 310). X Press release button : of the luggage holder and pull the strap out slightly. X Insert luggage holder ; into brackets A and, while doing so, press release button = and push the luggage holder downwards until it engages. X Press release button : of the luggage holder and pull the strap out in the direction of the arrow. X Place the load between the strap and the luggage compartment side wall. X Using one hand, press locking button : of the luggage holder. X With your other hand, let the strap go slowly until the load is secured. X Make sure that locking button ? on brackets A is pressed. This keeps brackets A in place on the loading rail. X To remove: press release button = on respective bracket A and remove luggage holder ; by pulling upwards and out. Stowage areas 311 The telescopic rod can be used to secure the load against the rear seats to prevent it from moving around. X To install: insert one bracket ; into both the left and the right loading rails and slide it to the desired position (Y page 310). X Insert telescopic rod : into brackets ; and, while doing so, press release button ? and push the rod downwards until it engages. X Make sure that locking button = on brackets ; is pressed. This keeps brackets ; in place on the loading rail. X To remove: press release button ? on respective bracket ; and remove telescopic rod : by pulling it upwards and out. Stowage well under the boot floor ! Remove the handle again before closing the boot lid and snap it in tightly to prevent the handle flap from protruding. Otherwise, you could damage the handle. The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment. X To open: pull handle : up. X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. Stowage compartment under the luggage compartment floor (CLS Shooting Brake) G WARNING If you drive when the luggage compartment floor is open, objects could be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. Always close the luggage compartment floor before a journey. Z Stowing and features Telescopic rod 312 Stowage areas Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Make sure that, depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can raise the sliding sunroof fully and open the boot lid or tailgate fully when the roof carrier is fitted. Stowing and features ! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers, do not use metallic or hard objects to open them. EASY-PACK load-securing kit, TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located underneath the luggage compartment floor. X To open: open the tailgate. X Holding the ribbing, press handle : downwards. Handle : folds upwards. X Swing the luggage compartment floor up using handle : until it stands vertically. X To close: fold the luggage compartment floor down. X Using handle :, press the luggage compartment floor down until it engages. The maximum roof load can be found in the "Technical Data" section (Y page 407). The maximum roof load can be found in the "Technical data" section in the printed Owner's Manual. An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. Attaching the roof carrier Roof carrier Important safety notes G WARNING When a load is transported on the roof, the vehicle's centre of gravity rises and the handling changes. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the handling as well as steering and braking characteristics are severely affected. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the maximum roof load and adapt your driving style. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Open covers : carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Features Cup holders Important safety notes ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. Cup holders in the front centre console X To open: slide cover ; to its foremost position. You can remove the cup holder insert to clean it. Wash it with clean, lukewarm water only. AMG vehicles: you can remove the rubber mat of the cup holder in the direction of the arrow to clean it. Wash it with clean, lukewarm water only. Stowing and features Features Cup holder in the rear-compartment centre console All vehicles (except AMG) To open: press the front of cover ;. To remove the insert: slide catch : inwards on both sides in the direction of the arrow. X Remove cup holder insert = upwards. X To refit the insert: place the insert in the stowage compartment. X Slide catch : outwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. X X CLS Coupé To open: slide cover : forwards. To remove the insert: slide catch ; inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove cup holder insert = upwards. X To refit the insert: place the insert in the stowage compartment. X Slide catch ; outwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. X X You can remove the insert and the rubber mat of the cup holder to clean them. Clean them with clean, lukewarm water only. Cup holder in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cup holder before folding the AMG vehicles : Cup holders ; Cover 313 rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. Z Features 314 ! Make sure that any bottles weighing more Stowing and features than 0.5 kg that are stored in the bottle holder rest on the vehicle floor. The bottle holder could otherwise be damaged. Example: CLS Coupé Fold down the rear seat armrest. To open: lift the cover of the rear seat armrest. X Press release catch :. Cup holder ; folds out forwards. X Fold the cover of the rear seat armrest back down again if necessary. X To close: lift the cover of the rear seat armrest. Swing cup holder ; back until it engages. X X Bottle holders Observe the "Important safety notes" in the "Stowage compartments" section (Y page 300). G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces while driving. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/luggage compartment. Press the outer edge of button : and slide in the direction of the arrow until the bottle fits into the opening. X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder. X The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a capacity of 0.7 l to 1.5 l. The bottle holder does not secure bottles; it merely prevents them from tipping over. Sun visors Overview : ; = ? A Mirror light Retainer Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket Vanity mirror Mirror cover Features Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. 315 Extending/retracting from the driver's seat Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X To extend or retract: briefly press button :. The roller sunblind fully extends or fully retracts. X To stop: briefly press button : again. The roller sunblind stops briefly and retracts into the out-of-use position. X Fold down sun visor :. Pull sun visor : out of retainer ;. X Swing sun visor : to the side. X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required. X X Rear-window roller sunblind (CLS Coupé) Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could be trapped in the sweep of the roller sunblind when the roller sunblind is extended or retracted. There is a risk of injury. When extending or retracting make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. Briefly press the button again if someone becomes trapped. The opening/ closing process is stopped. Ashtray Front ashtray ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. ! Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other objects could be damaged. All vehicles (except AMG) Z Stowing and features Glare from the side Features 316 To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X To remove the insert: hold insert = by the ribbing at the sides and lift it up ; and out. X To refit the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X To close: briefly press cover : at the front. The cover retracts. Stowing and features X Rear-compartment ashtray CLS Coupé To open: slide cover ; forwards. To remove the insert: pull insert : up and out. X To fit the insert: fit insert : into the holder from above and press down into the holder until it engages. X X AMG vehicles To open: briefly press the trim on cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X To remove the insert: slide insert ; forwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove insert ;. X To refit the insert: place the insert into the holder and press it in the opposite direction of the arrow until it engages. X To close: fold down cover :. X i You can remove the ashtray insert and use the resulting compartment for stowage. CLS Shooting Brake To open: briefly press cover ; at the top. The ashtray opens. X To remove the insert: press release button = and lift the insert up and out. X To fit the insert: fit insert : into the holder from above and press down into the holder until it engages. X Features 317 Cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: hot cigarette lighter falls child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Ra AMG vehicles Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X To open: briefly press the trim on cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. 12 V sockets All vehicles (except AMG) Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X To close: briefly press cover : at the front. The cover retracts. General notes X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as bulbs or chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. i An emergency cut-off ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. Z Stowing and features Rthe Features 318 Stowing and features Socket under the armrest AMG vehicles Open the stowage compartment under the armrest (Y page 302). X Lift up the cover of socket :. X Socket in the front centre console To open: briefly press the trim on cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X To close: fold down cover :. X Socket in the rear-compartment centre console All vehicles (except AMG) To open: slide cover : forwards until it engages. X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X To close: briefly press cover : at the front. The cover retracts. X CLS Coupé X X Slide cover ; forwards. Lift up the cover of socket :. CLS Shooting Brake Features Socket in the luggage compartment takes into consideration the scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. This ensures: Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in the vehicle Rthat mutual interference between the vehicle electronics and mobile phones is minimised An exterior aerial has the following advantages: Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gen- erated by a wireless device to the exterior field strength in the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial Information on retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) (Y page 396). Rthe CLS Shooting Brake X Lift up the cover of socket :. Mobile phone Important safety notes G WARNING Operating mobile communications equipment while driving distracts you from paying attention to traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Use this device only when the vehicle is stationary. i You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communications equipment in the vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you may only do so if the traffic situation permits. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. General notes There are various mobile phone brackets that may be fitted in your vehicle; in some cases, these are country-specific. You can connect a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone with Audio 20 or COMAND Online via the Bluetooth® interface. This also applies if your vehicle is equipped with convenience telephony. More information on suitable mobile phones, mobile phone brackets and on connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones with Audio 20 or COMAND Online can be obtained: Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect Ron i The functions and services available when you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial Z Stowing and features Briefly press cover ; at the top. The cover opens. X Lift up the cover of socket :. X 319 320 Features Stowing and features Using a mobile phone If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile phone bracket, the mobile phone will be charged and connected with the exterior aerial. X Open the telephone compartment (Y page 302). X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket; see the separate installation instructions for the mobile phone fitting. Operating the mobile phone You can operate the telephone using the 6 and ~ buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. You can operate other mobile phone functions via the on-board computer (Y page 247). When you remove the key from the ignition lock, the mobile phone is disconnected from the hands-free system. Active calls will first be transferred to the mobile phone directly. Garage door opener General notes The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Once programmed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming. The garage door opener is only available for certain countries. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. The HomeLink® garage door opener is compatible with most European garage and gate opener drives. More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is available: Rat a qualified specialised workshop Rvia the HomeLink® Hotline (0) 08000 466 354 65 or alternatively +49 (0) 6838 907-277 Ron the Internet at http://www.homelink.com Important safety notes G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Programming Programming buttons Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 320). Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror Garage door remote control A is not included with the integrated garage door opener. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Select one of buttons ; to ? to control the garage door drive. X To start programming mode: press and hold one of buttons ; to ? of the integrated garage door opener. The garage door opener is now in programming mode. After a short time, indicator lamp : begins to light up yellow. Indicator lamp : lights up yellow immediately the first time button ;, = or ? is programmed. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator lamp : lights up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X To program the remote control: point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 5 to 20 cm. X Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronise the rolling code. X Release button B of remote control A of the garage door drive. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts may be required. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Synchronising the rolling code Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 320). If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronise the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this, you will need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. The programming button may be placed at different locations, depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarise yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming of additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps. Your vehicle must be within range of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Get out of the vehicle. X Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step. Z 321 Stowing and features Features Features 322 X Stowing and features X Get into the vehicle. Press previously programmed button ;, = or ? of the integrated garage door opener until the door closes. The rolling code synchronisation is then complete. Problems when programming If you have problems when programming the integrated garage door opener, please note the following: RCheck the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control A and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of the garage door drive remote control. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. RWhen programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles from the button which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 5and 30 cm or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf there is another remote control for the same garage door drive, perform the programming steps again using this remote control. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been fitted in garage door drive remote control A. RNote that some remote controls transmit only for a limited period (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends. RAlign the aerial cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. Opening or closing the garage door Once programmed, the integrated garage door opener will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal for as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. Clearing the memory Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Press and hold buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green. X Release buttons ; and ?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared. Frequencies Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) EE (Estonia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 ES (Spain) 000438/2005, 000439/2005, 000440/2005 000441/2005, 000445/2005, 000446/2005 000447/2005 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 FI (Finland) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 FR (France) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Europe Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) AD (Andorra) 20 July 2005 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 AT (Austria) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 BE (Belgium) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 BG (Bulgaria) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 12 April 07 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 CH (Switzer- Article 6 of Directive land) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 27 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 CY (Cyprus) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 5 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 CZ (Czech Republic) General Licence GL-30/R/ 2000 Reg No. 844 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433 DK (Denmark) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 20 April 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 DE (Germany) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 7519301 29 April 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 GI (Gibraltar) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 (UK) MHz: 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 GR (Greece) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11409/18/4/2005 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 HR (Croatia) SDR 224/06 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 HU (Hungary) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Z 323 Stowing and features Features Stowing and features 324 Features Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) IC (Canary Islands) 000438/2005, 000439/2005 000440/2005, 000441/2005 000445/2005, 000446/2005 000447/2005, 3rd June 2005 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 LU (Luxembourg) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 150405/9538 24 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 LV (Latvia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27.4-1B-1609 26 April 06 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 MC (Monaco) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 MT (Malta) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 NL (Netherlands) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 IE (Ireland) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 IS (Iceland) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 IT (Italy) DGPGSR/II/ 347487/FOR/15347 DGPGSR/II/ 347487/FOR/15348 DGPGSR/II/ 347487/FOR/15350 DGPGSR/II/ 347487/FOR/15357 DGPGSR/II/ 347487/FOR/15358 DGPGSR/II/ 347487/FOR/15359 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 LI (Liechten- Article 6 of Directive stein) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 27 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 LT (Lithuania) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 NO (Norway) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 05/02424-SA644 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 PL (Poland) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 21 April 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 PT (Portugal) ANCOM-S08399/05 27, 40, 433, 868 RO (Romania) Article 6.4 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Features RU (Russian Federation) Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) POCC DE.MJ05.H00015 13 May 05 MHz: 433 SE (Sweden) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 SI (Slovenia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 500-1/2005-437 9 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 SK (Slovakia) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE Slovak 206/11/2005 4 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 UK (United Kingdom) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 05 MHz: 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 Africa Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) EG (Egypt) W-KLE-17/08 Mar. 06 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 RE (Réunion) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 July 05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 ZA (South Africa) America Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) BB (Barbados) Registration not required MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 CL (Chile) 38447/F-23 No.3.3634 MHz: 40, 433 3943/DFRS05165/F-50 MHz: 280 to 433 GF (French Guyana) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 GP (Guadeloupe) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 10668 13 May 05 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 MQ (Martini- Article 6 of Directive que) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 July 05 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 MX (Mexico) MHz: 280 to 390 Asia Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) AE (United Arab Emirates) 1623/5/10-2/26/76 MHz: 433 JO (Jordan) TRC/LPD/2005/23 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 KW (Kuwait) 5 October 2005 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 SA (Saudi Arabia) 11_02_05/5024-5-6 MHz: 418, 433 11 October 2005 MHz: 27, 40, 433 Z Stowing and features Country 325 Stowing and features 326 Features Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) SY (Syria) 279/4/14 / 05 March 06 TR (Turkey) National Certification 23 July 07 MHz: 433 Australia Country Radio type approval number Frequency range (MHz) AU (Australia) 28 June 2005 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 NZ (New Zealand) 20 March 06 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433 Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. Example: CLS Coupé Slide the seat backwards. To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat away from retainers ;. X Remove the floormats. X X Retrofitted anti-glare film Retrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of the windows can interfere with radio/mobile telephone reception. This is particularly the case for conductive or metallic-coated films. You can obtain information about anti-glare film from a qualified specialist workshop. 327 Useful information ............................ 328 Engine compartment ........................ 328 Service ............................................... 332 Maintenance and care Care .................................................... 334 328 Engine compartment Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Maintenance and care els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 26). Engine compartment Bonnet Important safety notes G WARNING An unlocked bonnet may open while driving and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlock the bonnet while driving. G WARNING When being opened and closed, the bonnet may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons in the range of movement of the bonnet. Open and close the bonnet only when nobody is in the range of movement. G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. G WARNING There are moving components in the engine compartment. Certain components may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. If you have to carry out work in the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever touch the dangerous areas surround- ing moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan Rremove jewellery and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts. G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate with a high voltage. If you touch the live components, you could receive an electric shock. There is a danger of injury. Never touch components of the ignition system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. Opening the bonnet G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. G WARNING When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet. Engine compartment not folded away from the windscreen. Otherwise, you could damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet. Radiator Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not cover the radiator. Do not use thermal mats, insect protection covers or anything similar. Doing so can cause the Onboard Diagnostics System to display inaccurate values. Some of these values are legally required and must always be correct. Engine oil General notes Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. The bonnet is released. X Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 litres of oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed at a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch handle ; up and lift the bonnet. If you lift the bonnet by approximately 40 cm, the bonnet is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut. Closing the bonnet Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. X the vehicle on a level surface Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. Z Maintenance and care ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are 329 Engine compartment 330 Maintenance and care G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil does not spill out over the filler neck. Allow the engine to cool down and thoroughly clean the components that have come into contact with engine oil before you start the engine. Example: vehicles with a petrol engine H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Only use engine oils and oil filters that Example: vehicles with a diesel engine Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil. X Adding engine oil G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system Rchanging the engine oil and oil filter after missing the change interval required by the service system Rusing engine oil additives ! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off. Engine compartment 331 Example: engine oil filler cap Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it. Top up the engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Make sure that the cap locks securely into place. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 329). X X For further information on engine oil, see (Y page 404). Other service products Checking the coolant level G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. G WARNING The engine cooling system is under pressure, particularly if the engine is warm. You could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out when opening the cap. There is a danger of injury. Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level if the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 159). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 70 †. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. If the coolant level is approximately 1.5 cm above marker bar = in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. X If necessary, top up with coolant that has been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. X Z Maintenance and care Allow the engine to cool before opening the cap. Wear gloves and protective eyewear when opening. Slowly turn the cap half a turn to allow pressure to escape. Service 332 For further information on coolant, see (Y page 405). Topping up the windscreen washer system/headlamp cleaning system Maintenance and care G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. G WARNING If windscreen washer concentrate comes into contact with hot components of the engine or the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure the windscreen washer concentrate does not come into contact with the filler neck. ing you to top up the washer fluid (Y page 285). Further information on windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 406). Service ASSYST PLUS Service messages The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Service Booklet). You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 329). The multifunction display shows a service message for a few seconds, e.g.: RService A in .. days A overdue RService A overdue by .. days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter indicates which service is due. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. A number or another letter may be displayed after the letter. Only for certain countries: the position after the letter A or B indicates any necessary additional maintenance work to be performed. If you notify a qualified specialist workshop of this display, you will receive a statement on the associated costs. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. RService To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. X Top up with the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. X The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the windscreen washer system and the headlamp cleaning system. If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 litre, a message appears in the multifunction display prompt- Service X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Hiding service messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. Displaying service messages Switch the ignition on. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X X Information about Service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Service work will need to be performed more often if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads, for example: Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi- ate stops the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances Rfor frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods In these or similar operating conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. Rif Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. AdBlue® service indicator i For BlueTEC vehicles only. To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment must be operated with the reducing agent AdBlue®. AdBlue® is topped up as part of the service. Under normal operating conditions, a full tank of AdBlue® should last until the next service due date. Depending on how and where the vehicle is used, there may be an increase in the AdBlue® consumption, resulting in the next service due date being brought forward. Certain display messages show that AdBlue® must be topped up, e.g.: Z Maintenance and care Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: 333 334 Care Refill AdBlue at workshop See Own‐ er's Manual Refill AdBlue at workshop No start in .. km A warning signal also sounds. You can no longer start the engine when the AdBlue® supply has been used up (Y page 273). Maintenance and care ! Have the AdBlue® tank topped up at a qualified specialist workshop only. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged or soiled. Before taking a trip with your vehicle outside Europe, have the AdBlue® supply checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If necessary, have AdBlue® topped up. Before a prolonged stay outside of Europe, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the notes on AdBlue® (Y page 403). Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment and AdBlue® can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Care General notes H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. Rabrasive ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of an accident. After washing the vehicle, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions in order to restore full braking efficiency. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are closed completely. Rthe blower for the ventilation/heating is switched off (OFF button is depressed). Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at position 0. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. ! In car washes with a towing mechanism, Washing by hand Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N: In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. make sure that the automatic transmission is in transmission position N, otherwise the vehicle could be damaged. RVehicles with a key: do not remove the key from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. You can prevent this by shifting the automatic transmission to N beforehand. RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: do not open the driver's door or frontpassenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 159) in the ignition lock. Use the key instead of the Start/Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. X You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windscreen and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible. High-pressure cleaning equipment G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the highpressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Z 335 Maintenance and care Care 336 Care Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtyres Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim elements Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Maintenance and care Relectrical Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove impurities immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. Care and treatment of matt paintwork ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork shiny. ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matt effect: RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials. RFrequent use of car washes. RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matt finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matt finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light-alloy wheels with a clear matt finish. i The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. i Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Cleaning vehicle parts Cleaning the wheels ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you Care ! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. Cleaning the windows G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windscreen could be damaged if the wiper arm hits against it suddenly. Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen. X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a damp cloth. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before switching on the ignition. X Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windscreen and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Mirror turn signals ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. Cleaning the wiper blades G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pressure cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 30 cm between the Z Maintenance and care should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked up. 337 Care 338 Maintenance and care vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the trailer tow hitch (CLS Shooting Brake) H Environmental note Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an environmentally-responsible manner. ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a highpressure cleaner. Do not use solvents. ! Please note the care instructions in the X trailer coupling manufacturer's operating instructions. Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the reversing camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the reversing camera with a highpressure cleaner. The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes dirty or corroded. Remove rust, e.g. with a wire brush. Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush. X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball coupling :. X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is working properly. X X X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acidbased cleaning agents such as sanitary cleansers or wheel cleaners. i You can also have the maintenance work on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. Care 339 Interior care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfibre cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibre cloth. X Cleaning Night View Assist Plus ! Never clean the camera lens. When cleaning the field of vision of the driving systems, make sure that you do not spray glass cleaner on the camera lens. If the camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Use a soft cloth to clean the windscreen in front of camera ;. Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. This could result in plastic parts breaking away when the airbags are deployed. There is a danger of injury. Do not use care products and cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the cockpit. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You could otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come in contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change colour temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. X X Fold down the camera cover by recess :. Z Maintenance and care Rabrasive Care 340 Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning wooden trim and trim elements Maintenance and care ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. Wipe the wooden trim and trim elements with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Cleaning the seat covers General notes ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can damage the cover. i Note that regular care is essential to make sure that the appearance and comfort of the covers are retained over time. Genuine leather seat covers Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, e.g.: Runevenness in structure Rmarks caused by growth and injury Rsubtle colour differences These are characteristics of leather and not material faults. ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Seat covers from other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub carefully, and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. RClean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts may be severely weakened if bleached or coloured. This may lead to the seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never bleach or colour seat belts. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 80 † or in direct sunlight. Care Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. Cleaning the roof lining and carpets Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Cleaning the designo wooden luggage compartment floor (CLS Shooting Brake) With a lint-free cotton cloth, distribute a thin layer of wood oil evenly over the wooden surface using a simple wiping motion. Always wipe in the direction of the grain. X Then, using a second lint-free cotton cloth, apply the remaining wood oil. A new protective coating forms within approximately four hours. X i A second treatment with the wood oil is recommended for extremely worn wooden luggage compartment floor surfaces. ! For cleaning and treating the wooden lug- gage compartment floor, do not use any of the following: Rmicrofibre cloth cleaning agents Rcommercially available furniture polishes, sprays or similar items Rsteam cleaners Otherwise, the surface of the wooden luggage compartment floor will be damaged. Rhousehold ! Do not apply self-adhesive films or masking strips to the wooden luggage compartment floor; the solvent residue and plasticisers contained in them may destroy the paintwork. Use a lint-free cotton cloth to remove dust, dirt and fingerprints. If necessary, dampen the lint-free cotton cloth with a small amount of clear water. Use wood oil recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz to treat and protect the wooden luggage compartment floor. This revitalises the wooden surface and increases the resilience of the wood. To apply the wood oil: Using the sanding pad that comes with the care set, sand the wooden surface in the direction of the grain. X Remove the wood dust. X Z Maintenance and care X 341 342 343 Useful information ............................ 344 Where will I find...? ........................... 344 Flat tyre ............................................. 347 Battery (vehicle) ................................ 351 Jump-starting .................................... 355 Towing and tow-starting .................. 357 Breakdown assistance Electrical fuses ................................. 360 Where will I find...? 344 Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. CLS Shooting Brake: open the tailgate. X Open the right-hand side trim panel. X Remove warning triangle :. X Setting up the warning triangle i Read the information on qualified special- Breakdown assistance ist workshops: (Y page 26). Where will I find...? Warning triangle Removing the warning triangle X X Fold feet = down and out to the side. Fold side reflectors ; upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using press stud :. First-aid kit CLS Coupé: open the boot lid. X Turn the catch 90° in the direction of the arrow and remove warning triangle :. X CLS Coupé: open the boot lid. X Slide the stowage net down. X Open the stowage compartment. X Remove first-aid kit :. X Where will I find...? Pull handle : upward and fold cover ; forward. X Remove the fire extinguisher from the stowage compartment. i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after each use and checked every one or two years. It may otherwise fail in an emergency. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. 345 Example: first-aid kit in the boot CLS Shooting Brake: depending on the vehicle's equipment, the first-aid kit is in the stowage net or behind the side trim panel. Open the boot lid. X Open the left-hand side trim panel if the first-aid kit is located there. X Remove first-aid kit :. X i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace any missing items. Fire extinguisher ! Keep the stowage compartment closed while the vehicle is in motion. It may otherwise be damaged. The fire extinguisher is located in the stowage compartment underneath the driver's seat. Vehicle tool kit General notes The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the boot floor/luggage compartment floor (Y page 311). Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle tool kit is on the left-hand side or the right-hand side in the stowage well under the boot floor/ luggage compartment floor. i Apart from some country-specific var- iants, vehicles are not equipped with tyrechanging tools. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Necessary tyre-changing tools can include, for example: RJack RWheel RWheel chock wrench Breakdown assistance X Where will I find...? 346 Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit The vehicle tool kit contains: RFolding RFuse wheel chock allocation chart RJack RCentring pin pair of gloves RWheel wrench RTowing eye Breakdown assistance ROne Example: CLS Coupé : Towing eye ; Tyre sealant filler bottle = Tyre inflation compressor ? Fuse allocation chart X X Vehicles with collapsible emergency spare wheel (AMG vehicles) Open the boot lid/tailgate. Swing the boot/luggage compartment floor upwards (Y page 311) or (Y page 311). Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel Example: CLS Coupé : Towing eye ; One pair of gloves = Jack ? Folding wheel chock A Centring pin B Sheet for faulty wheel C Tyre inflation compressor D Wheel wrench E Fuse allocation chart X Example: CLS Coupé : Vehicle tool kit tray ; Stowage tray = "Minispare" emergency spare wheel X X Open the boot lid/tailgate. Swing the boot/luggage compartment floor upwards (Y page 311) or (Y page 311). X Open the boot lid/tailgate. Swing the boot/luggage compartment floor upwards (Y page 311) or (Y page 311). Flat tyre Flat tyre Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: X X 347 Close the driver's door. Place the warning triangle a suitable distance away (Y page 344). Observe legal requirements. RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char- MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) General notes With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. The affected tyre must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the tyre wall. You will find this marking next to the tyre size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index. MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an active tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitoring system. If the pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: Robserve the instructions in the display mes- sages (Y page 280). the tyre for damage. Rif driving on, observe the following notes. The maximum driving distance is approximately 80 km when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 30 km when the vehicle is fully laden. In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: Rcheck Rspeed Rroad condition temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/manoeuvres, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. Routside Breakdown assistance acteristics) (Y page 347) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tyres. Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 345) Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain countries) (Y page 390) Information on changing/fitting a wheel (Y page 373). X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that "normal" level is selected (Y page 202). X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 159). X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. 348 Flat tyre The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tyre pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. i When replacing one or all tyres, make sure that you use only: Rthe tyre size specified for the vehicle and Breakdown assistance Rtyre(s) marked "MOExtended" If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, a standard tyre may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tyre). i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres, and driving over obstacles (kerbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Rthe RESP® Rthere is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The faulty tyre must be replaced. TIREFIT kit Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò20 †. G WARNING In the following situations, the tyre sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tyre sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. Flat tyre 349 RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- Using the TIREFIT kit Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out of the housing. X Screw hose A onto flange B of tyre sealant bottle :. X Place tyre sealant bottle : head downwards into recess ; of the tyre inflation compressor. X TIREFIT sticker, 2-part Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage space under the boot floor/luggage compartment floor (Y page 345). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X Insert plug ? into a 12 V socket (Y page 317) in your vehicle. Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 317). X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Press on/off switch = on the tyre inflation compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). X Z Breakdown assistance pressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Flat tyre 350 Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase. X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for five minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). Breakdown assistance If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tyre pressure reached" (Y page 350). If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tyre pressure not reached" (Y page 350). Tyre pressure reached G WARNING A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant. ! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. i If the tyre sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. Tyre pressure not reached If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes: Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 10 m. X Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of five minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi). X X G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes: Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Pull away immediately. The maximum speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by the driver. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can signif- Battery (vehicle) i In your vehicle, you will find a sticker with the Mercedes-Benz Service24h telephone number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the fuel filler flap for values. X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor. X X To reduce the tyre pressure: depress pressure release button E next to pressure gauge F. When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tyre. X Screw the valve cap onto the tyre valve of the sealed tyre. X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Work on the battery, e.g. removing or fitting, requires specialist knowledge and the use of special tools. Therefore, always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery may lead to a malfunction, e.g. a short circuit. This, in turn, may restrict the functions of the safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may then be compromised. You could then lose control of the vehicle, e.g.: Rwhen braking making sudden steering movements and/or travelling at an inappropriate speed. There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or similar situation, inform a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Rwhen For further information about ABS and ESP®, see (Y page 70) and (Y page 72). G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Z Breakdown assistance icantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. 351 352 Battery (vehicle) Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and when jumpstarting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. Electrostatic charge is created, for example: Rby wearing synthetic fibre clothing to friction between clothing and the seat Rwhen you pull or push the battery across carpet or other synthetic materials Rwhen you rub the battery with a cloth Breakdown assistance Rdue G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Service Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. ! You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that: Ryou switch off the engine and remove the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged. Ryou first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Rthe transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. Battery (vehicle) Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. WARNING Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. i When you park the vehicle, remove the key if you do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. i If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if the battery was discharged, you will have to: Rset the clock. Information on setting the clock can be found in the separate operating instructions. On vehicles with COMAND Online and a navigation system, the clock is set automatically. Rreset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 117). Observe this Owner's Manual. Charging the battery For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In such cases, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from Z Breakdown assistance The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be fitted securely during operation. 353 354 Battery (vehicle) batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. Breakdown assistance ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstart connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 355). X Open the bonnet. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and earth point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 355). If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jumpstart the vehicle. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Never charge a battery still installed in the vehicle unless a battery charger unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used . A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Jump-starting 355 Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment. G WARNING G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Vehicles with a petrol engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the non-combusted fuel may damage the catalytic converter. Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RVehicles with a petrol engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. Z Breakdown assistance Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. Jump-starting 356 RJump-starting may only be performed using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: ROnly RThe jump leads are not damaged. RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump leads are connected to the battery. jump leads cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Firmly depress the parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating, lighting etc. X Open the bonnet. Breakdown assistance RThe Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device. Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow. Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jump lead. Always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes. X X Towing and tow-starting 357 First, remove the jump leads from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jump leads. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes G WARNING Safety-relevant functions are restricted or not available if: Rthe engine is not running. Rthe brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning Rthe voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system is malfunctioning. If your vehicle is towed, significantly greater force may be required to steer the vehicle or to brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such circumstances, use a towing bar. Make sure that the steering is moving freely before towing. G WARNING If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or towstarted is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle: Rthe towing eye could detach itself Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could over- turn. There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. i Information on your vehicle's gross vehi- cle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 398). ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash ! Only secure the tow cable or tow bar to the towing eyes or, if available, to the trailer tow hitch. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. ! Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope: RSecure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles. RMake sure that the tow rope is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This will make other road users aware that a vehicle is being towed. ROnly secure the tow cable to the towing eyes or, if available, to the trailer tow hitch. RObserve the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance a distance so that the tow rope does not sag. RDo not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. Z Breakdown assistance Towing and tow-starting 358 Towing and tow-starting ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! To tow vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use Breakdown assistance the key instead of the Start/Stop button. The automatic transmission may otherwise switch to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door which could damage the transmission. Fitting/removing the towing eye Fitting the towing eye G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe may be extremely hot. There is a risk of burning when removing the rear cover. Do not touch the exhaust tail pipe. Use extreme caution when removing the rear cover. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. Observe the legal requirements for the relevant countries when towing. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Towing eye covers (example: CLS Coupé) Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N i Deactivate the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed away (Y page 90). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. i Deactivate tow-away protection before the vehicle is towed away (Y page 79). Towing eye covers (AMG vehicles) Towing and tow-starting Removing the towing eye Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. Position cover : on top of the bumper and press it in at the bottom until it engages. X Attach cover ; to the bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. X X Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. Only possible on vehicles without 4MATIC. Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 126). X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the key from the ignition lock. X When leaving the vehicle, take the key or the KEYLESS-GO key with you. X When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 357). Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 357). The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 159). X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 126). X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition lock. i When towing with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual to signal a change of direction. In this case, only the turn signals for the desired direction flash. When you reset the combination switch, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again. X Transporting the vehicle ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. Z Breakdown assistance The mountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear under the covers. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 345). X Pull cover : out of the bumper in the direction of the arrow by inserting your fingers into the recess. X Press the mark on cover ; inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove cover ; from the opening. X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the stop and tighten it. 359 Electrical fuses 360 The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transportation. The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if you wish to transport it. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. As soon as the vehicle is loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the key from the ignition lock. X Secure the vehicle. Breakdown assistance X Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged. If the vehicle has transmission damage or damage to the front or rear axle, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 355). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. The transmission may otherwise be damaged. i You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (Y page 355). Electrical fuses Important safety notes G WARNING If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This may result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses of the correct amperage. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. The fuses in your vehicle serve to disconnect faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions will fail. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Before replacing a fuse Observe the important safety notes (Y page 360) Electrical fuses Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 180). X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 159). or X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 159). X 361 ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. X Open the bonnet. X Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel RCLS Coupé: fuse box located in the boot on the right-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel RCLS Shooting Brake: fuse box located in the luggage compartment on the righthand side when viewed in the direction of travel CLS Coupé: the fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment under the boot floor (Y page 345). CLS Shooting Brake: the fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment under the luggage compartment floor (Y page 345). Fuse box in the engine compartment Observe the important safety notes (Y page 360) G WARNING When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. X To open: take lines ; out of the guides. X Move lines ; to one side. Route the lines behind connection = to do this. X Open retaining clamps :. X Remove the fuse box cover forwards. X To close: check whether the rubber seal is seated correctly in the cover. X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer. X Fold down cover and close clamps :. X Secure lines ; in the guides. X Close the bonnet. X Fuse box in the boot (CLS Coupé) Observe the important safety notes (Y page 360) ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. Z Breakdown assistance All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: Electrical fuses 362 X Open the boot lid. To open: release cover : at the top right and left-hand sides with a flat object. X Open cover : downwards in the direction of the arrow. Breakdown assistance X Fuse box in the luggage compartment (CLS Shooting Brake) Observe the important safety notes (Y page 360) ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. X Open the tailgate. To open: turn rotary catch : over the cover anti-clockwise. X Swing the cover down. X Swing trim ; forwards. X 363 Useful information ............................ 364 Important safety notes .................... 364 Operation ........................................... 364 Winter operation ............................... 366 Tyre pressure .................................... 367 Changing a wheel ............................. 373 Wheel and tyre combinations .......... 378 Wheels and tyres Emergency spare wheel ................... 390 364 Operation Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 26). Tyres with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about: Rsuitability Wheels and tyres Important safety notes G WARNING If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rtype When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rtype G WARNING A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tyres without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tyre. replace the flat tyre with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Rimmediately Rlegal stipulations recommendations Information on the dimensions and types of wheels and tyres for your vehicle can be found under "Wheel/tyre combinations" (Y page 378)(Y page 380). Information on air pressure for the tyres on your vehicle can be found: Rfactory Ron the tyre pressure label on the fuel filler flap (Y page 178) Runder "Tyre pressure" (Y page 367) Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted. The use of wheel spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates the general operating permit for the vehicle. i Further information on wheels and tyres can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Operation Information on driving Check the tyre pressures when the vehicle is heavily laden and, if necessary, adjust. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon Operation Regular checking of wheels and tyres G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. other valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary (Y page 367). Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 390). The service life of tyres depends on various factors, including the following: Rdriving style pressure Rmileage Rtyre Important safety notes on the tyre tread G WARNING Rpunctures Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre traction. The tyre is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. Minimum tyre tread depth for: Rtears Rsummer Regularly check the wheels and tyres of your vehicle for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tyres in the tyres on the tyres Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 365). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Do not fit any Rbulges tyres: 3 mm tyres: 4 mm For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tyre tread depth is reached. RM+S Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with Z Wheels and tyres as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged. 365 366 Winter operation Wheels and tyres run-flat characteristics)" section (Y page 347). ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. They only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little tread depth. This otherwise significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 390). MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. Only use MOExtended tyres in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitoring system and only on tyres specifically inspected by Mercedes‑Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres with a flat tyre (Y page 347). i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation General notes Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 373). Driving with summer tyres At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tyres on your vehicle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. M+S tyres G WARNING M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of accident. M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced. At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres or all-season tyres. Both types of tyre are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tyres will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tyres have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Tyre pressure Check the tyre pressures (Y page 367). Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 369). X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 372). X X For more information on driving with the emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 390). Snow chains G WARNING If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever Rfit fit snow chains on the front wheels snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corresponding standard of quality. If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheeltyre combinations. Permissible wheel-tyre combinations (Y page 378). Ronly use snow chains if the road surface is completely snow-covered. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to fit snow chains. Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. Ron vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains have been fitted (Y page 202). i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling away with snow chains fitted (Y page 73). This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). For more information on driving with the emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 390). Tyre pressure Tyre pressure specifications G WARNING Tyres with insufficient or excessive tyre pressure harbour the following hazards: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively or unevenly which can severely impair tyre traction. Rthe handling as well as steering and braking characteristics may be severely affected. There is a risk of an accident. Z Wheels and tyres Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tyres you have fitted. If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maximum permissible speed than that of the vehicle, affix a corresponding warning label in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Under these circumstances, you should also restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle using permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it does not exceed the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres (Y page 191). When you have fitted the M+S tyres: 367 368 Tyre pressure Observe the recommended tyre pressures and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres including the spare wheel: Revery day before starting a journey the load changes Rprior to long journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. offroad driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Rwhen Wheels and tyres G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyre valves, the tyre valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pressure monitors keep the tyre valve open. This can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of accident. Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically provided by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tyre valve. G WARNING If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre pressure that is too low may result in a tyre blow-out. There is a risk of accident. RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. You will find a table of tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. Operation with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 390). Operation with a trailer: the applicable value for the rear tyres is the maximum tyre pressure value stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap. The table inside the fuel filler flap may state tyre pressures for different load conditions. These are defined in the table as different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may vary; for more information, please refer to the vehicle's registration documents. If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pressures stated on the tyre pressure information label apply for all tyres approved for this vehicle. If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for that tyre size. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the electronic tyre pressure monitor, the tyre pressure can be checked using the on-board computer. If possible, only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. The tyres are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1.6 km Depending on the ambient temperature, the speed at which you are driving and the load on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyre pressure changes by approximately Tyre pressure Rshorten the service life of the tyres increased tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics and thus driving safety (e.g. aquaplaning) Rcause i The tyre pressure values given for low loads are minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics. However, you can also use the values given for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle. For speeds up to 210 km/h (does not apply to AMG vehicles): for speeds up to 210 km/h, the values given on the tyre pressure information label (fuel filler flap) may be reduced by 20 kPa (0.2 bar/3 psi) without a reduction in safety. This improves the ride comfort of your vehicle; however, fuel consumption may increase slightly. Tyre pressure loss warning system General notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. You can recognise the tyre pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message which appears in the Serv. menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system" section (Y page 369). Important safety notes The tyre pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 367). The tyre pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tyre pressures. An even loss of pressure on several tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's tyres Rroad conditions are wintry Ryou are driving on sand or gravel Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration) Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof) Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tyre pressure the wheels or tyres Rfitted new wheels or tyres X Before restarting, make sure that the tyre pressures are set properly on all four tyres Rchanged Z Wheels and tyres 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi) per 10 †. Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tyres. Only correct the tyre pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: 369 Tyre pressure Wheels and tyres 370 for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tyre pressures can be found in the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap. The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. X Observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 367). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Tyre pressure menu. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message appears in the multifunction display. Tyre pressure monitor General notes If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres. The tyre pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are fitted to all wheels. Information on tyre pressures is shown in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tyre pressure of each tyre is shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: Example: current tyre pressure display Press the a button. The Tyre press. now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. Yes X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. For further information on displaying this message, refer to the "Checking the tyre pressure electronically" section (Y page 371). X If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. or When the Tyre press. now OK? message appears, press the 9 or : button to select Cancel Cancel. X Press the a button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Important safety notes It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation (Y page 367). Note that the correct tyre pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the taught-in reference values. Restart the tyre pressure monitor after adjusting the pressures when the tyres are cold tyre (Y page 372). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. This will ensure that a warning message will only appear if the tyre pressure drops significantly. The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe Tyre pressure Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tyre pressure on one or more tyres is significantly too low. The tyre pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning. i In addition to the warning lamp, a mes- sage appears in the multifunction display. Further information can be found at (Y page 280). If the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning, it may take more than ten minutes for the tyre pressure warning lamp to inform you of the malfunction by flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the fault has been rectified, the tyre pressure warning lamp goes out after you have driven for a few minutes. The tyre pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a filling station using a pressure gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the onboard computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures. The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Checking the tyre pressure electronically Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The current tyre pressure for each wheel will be displayed in the multifunction display. X If the vehicle has been parked for over 20 minutes, the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message appears. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tyre pressure values to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tyre pressure monitor active display message is shown instead of the tyre pressure display. The tyre pressures are already being monitored. i If an emergency spare wheel is fitted, for a few minutes the system may continue to show the tyre pressure of the wheel that has been removed. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. Z Wheels and tyres the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 367). The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is punctured by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Depending on how the warning lamp flashes or lights up, a tyre pressure that is too low or a malfunction in the tyre pressure monitor is indicated: 371 372 Tyre pressure Warning messages of the tyre pressure monitor If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tyres, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display and the yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp comes on. Wheels and tyres RIf the Please correct tyre pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre is too low and must be corrected at the next opportunity. RIf the Check tyre(s) message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly and the tyres must be checked. RIf the Warning tyre defect message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly and the tyres must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tyres" section (Y page 280). i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are Using the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap, ensure that the tyre pressure is set correctly in all four tyres for the current operating conditions. Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 367). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tyre pressure for the individual tyres or the Tyre pressures will be dis‐ played after a few minutes of driv‐ ing message. X Press the : button. The Use current pressures as new reference values message appears in the multifunction display. X If you wish to confirm the restart: X interchanged, the tyre pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. After a few minutes of driving, this is rectified and the tyre pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tyre pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tyre pressure monitor then monitors the new tyre pressure values. Press the a button. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The new tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Changing a wheel Country Radio type approval number Singapore Compliance with IDA Standard DA- 103365 TA-2012/719 TA-2012/1540 TA-2011/1370 Country Radio type approval number Brazil 2770-12-8001 Model: MW2433A 0381-13-8001 Model: GG4 South Africa Dubai TRA, Registered NO ER0092100/12 TRA, Registered NO ER0099792/12 TRA, Registered NO ER0076990/11 Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10 Changing a wheel Jordan Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMS transmitter Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/114 Model: Gen Gamma Gen 4 433.92 Mhz. Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/190 Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4 Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2011/158 Type Number: LPD Morocco MR7319 ANRT 2012/ 11/07/2012 MR7672 ANRT 2012/ 23/11/2012 MR6706 ANRT 2011 Moldova 1024 Philippines No: ESD-1206394C No: ESD-1306995C Serbia И 011 12 Flat tyre You can find information on what to do in the event of a flat tyre in the "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 347). Information on driving with MOExtended tyres in the event of a flat tyre can be found under "Breakdown assistance" (Y page 347). Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: in the event of a flat tyre, the emergency spare wheel is fitted according to the description under "Fitting a wheel" (Y page 374). Interchanging the wheels G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Interchange front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, as this could damage the electronic components. Only have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Wheels and tyres Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor 373 Wheels and tyres 374 Changing a wheel Interchanging the front and rear wheels of differing dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Fitting a wheel" section (Y page 374). The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ depending on the operating conditions. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the centre. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor. Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. ponents damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. Fitting a wheel Preparing the vehicle Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the parking brake. X Move the front wheels to the straightahead position. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that "normal" vehicle level is selected (Y page 202). X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 159). X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tyre-change tool kit from the vehicle (Y page 345). X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. X i Apart from some country-specific varCleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Com- iants, vehicles are not equipped with tyrechanging tools. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Changing a wheel Necessary wheel-changing tools may include, for example: 375 the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Rjack Rwheel Rwheel chock wrench Securing the vehicle against rolling away Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients (example: CLS Coupé) If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tyre-change tool kit (Y page 345). The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. On slight downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. Observe the following when raising the vehicle: Rto Securing the vehicle on level ground (example: CLS Coupé) X On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of raise the vehicle, only use the vehiclespecific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the jack is used incorrectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suitable for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. Z Wheels and tyres X Changing a wheel 376 Wheels and tyres Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and positioning wheel chocks. Never release the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity due to the restricted height. Rmake sure that the distance between the underside of the tyres and the ground does not exceed 3 cm. Rnever place your hands or feet under the raised vehicle. Rdo not lie under the vehicle. Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Rdo not open or close a door or the boot lid/ tailgate when the vehicle is raised. Rmake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Jacking points (example: CLS Coupé) X Position jack = at jacking point ;. Example X X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned vertically under the jacking point. Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = sits completely on jacking point ; and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn crank ? until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm off the ground. X Changing a wheel Removing a wheel ! AMG vehicles: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and get a second person to assist you. Alternatively, you can use a second centring pin. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. 377 G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notices in "Changing a wheel" (Y page 373). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, take precautions and have a second person assist you. Alternatively, you can use a second centring pin. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw centring pin : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel. X Fitting a new wheel G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. Attaching a wheel (example: vehicle with emergency spare wheel) Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the centring pin and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. X Unscrew the centring pin. X Z Wheels and tyres ! AMG vehicle with ceramic brake discs: Wheel and tyre combinations 378 Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. X Vehicles with a collapsible emergency spare wheel: inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel (Y page 392). Only then lower the vehicle. X Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. ! Vehicles with a collapsible emergency Wheels and tyres spare wheel: Inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel using the tyre inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The rim could otherwise be damaged. Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the boot/load compartment again. X Check the air pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust accordingly. Observe the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 367). X i Vehicles with a tyre pressure control system: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. Wheel and tyre combinations General notes ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- ommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These are specially adapted to the control systems, such as ABS or ESP® and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- Tightening the wheel bolts (example: vehicle with emergency spare wheel) Turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The specified tightening torque is 130 Nm. X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X tain AMG tyres) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimension variations could cause the tyres to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tyres, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Wheel and tyre combinations Further information about wheels, tyres and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor 379 kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be fitted at the factory in all countries. recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. ! Large wheels: the lower the section width Wheels and tyres for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll comfort and suspension comfort are reduced and the risk of damage to the wheels and tyres as a result of driving over obstacles increases. Overview of abbreviations used in the following tyre tables: RBA: both axles front axle RRA: rear axle You will find a table with recommended tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. For further information on tyre pressure, see (Y page 367). Check tyre pressures regularly and only when the tyres are cold. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit the vehicle: RFA: Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle (left/right) Rwith the same type of tyres at a given time (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT Z Wheel and tyre combinations 380 Tyres CLS 250 CDI Summer tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL1, 2, 3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 30 BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 R 18 Tyres BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y Wheels and tyres Light-alloy wheels XL3 R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 All-weather tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Winter tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 V XL M+Si2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 Not for CLS Shooting Brake. Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or Sports package code 950. 3 Available as MOExtended tyres. 4 The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 5 Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". 1 2 Wheel and tyre combinations 381 R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 CLS 350 Summer tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Wheels and tyres R 18 R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 All-weather tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Available as MOExtended tyres. Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or Sports package code 950. 4 The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 5 Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". 3 2 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 382 Winter tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 V XL M+Si2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 CLS 350 BlueTEC Wheels and tyres Summer tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or Sports package code 950. Available as MOExtended tyres. 4 The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 5 Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". 2 3 Wheel and tyre combinations 383 All-weather tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Winter tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 V XL M+Si2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 R 18 BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL Light-alloy wheels M+Si3 Wheels and tyres Tyres BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 CLS 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC Summer tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". 2 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or Sports package code 950. 3 Available as MOExtended tyres. 4 5 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 384 R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 All-weather tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Wheels and tyres Winter tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 V XL M+Si2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 CLS 350 CDI Summer tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 2 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or Sports package code 950. 3 Available as MOExtended tyres. 5 4 Wheel and tyre combinations 385 R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Wheels and tyres All-weather tyres R 18 Winter tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 V XL M+Si2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 Available as MOExtended tyres. The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 5 Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". 2 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or Sports package code 950. 3 4 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 386 CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC Summer tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Wheels and tyres R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 All-weather tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Winter tyres R 17 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S i2 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 BA: 245/45 R17 99 V XL M+Si2, 3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 34.5 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486 or Sports package code 950. Available as MOExtended tyres. 4 The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 5 Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". 2 3 Wheel and tyre combinations 387 R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 CLS 500 Summer tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 Wheels and tyres R 19 All-weather tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Winter tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 Available as MOExtended tyres. The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 5 Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". 3 4 Z Wheel and tyre combinations 388 CLS 500 4MATIC Summer tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL3 RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y3, 4 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Wheels and tyres R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48 All-weather tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S RA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S4, 5 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48 Winter tyres R 18 Tyres Light-alloy wheels BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 34.5 CLS 63 AMG Summer tyres R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL5 RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y) XL4, 5 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47 Available as MOExtended tyres. The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 5 Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". 3 4 Wheel and tyre combinations 389 Winter tyres R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si5, 6 RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i5, 6 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52 FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+S i4, 5 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47 CLS 63 AMG S-MODEL Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL5 RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y)XL4, 5 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47 Wheels and tyres Summer tyres R19 Winter tyres R19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i5, 6 RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si5, 6, 7 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52 FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+S i4, 5 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47 CLS 63 AMG 4MATIC Summer tyres R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL5 RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y) XL4, 5 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47 Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". CLS Shooting-Brake: maximum permissible speed 220 km/h. 4 The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 7 Only fine-link snow chains are permitted. 5 6 Z Emergency spare wheel 390 Winter tyres R 19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i5, 6 RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i5, 6 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52 FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+S i4, 5 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47 CLS 63 AMG S-MODEL 4MATIC Wheels and tyres Summer tyres R19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL5 RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y)XL4, 5 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47 Winter tyres R19 Tyres Light-alloy wheels FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i5, 6 RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i5, 6, 7 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52 FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+S i5 RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+S i4, 5 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2 ET 47 Emergency spare wheel To prevent hazardous situations: Important safety notes RAdapt G WARNING The wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre type of the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fitting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emergency spare wheel if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. ROnly use a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel briefly if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tyre combinations". CLS Shooting-Brake: maximum permissible speed 220 km/h. 4 The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 7 Only fine-link snow chains are permitted. 5 6 Emergency spare wheel not switch off ESP®. RHave the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel in question replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Make sure that the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyre type are correct. RDo When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. Snow chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels. 391 Removing the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel/collapsible emergency spare wheel Opening the stowage well CLS Coupé: the emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the boot floor. X Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 311). You should regularly check the pressure of all your tyres, including the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 367). The value on the wheel is valid. In addition, the emergency spare wheel tyre pressure can be found under "Technical data" (Y page 394). An emergency spare wheel may also be fitted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel. Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel. i If you are driving with the collapsible emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning system/tyre pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor: after mounting an emergency spare wheel, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. Example: CLS Shooting Brake, stowage space under the luggage compartment floor CLS Shooting Brake: the emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the luggage compartment floor. X Swing the luggage compartment floor upwards (Y page 311). X Remove stowage compartment :. Removing the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel Stowage space (example: CLS Coupé) Z Wheels and tyres General notes Emergency spare wheel 392 Open the stowage well (Y page 391). Turn stowage tray ; anti-clockwise and remove together with vehicle tool kit tray :. X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel =. X X Removing the collapsible emergency spare wheel (AMG vehicles) Wheels and tyres Unscrew the valve cap from the valve. Use the back of the valve cap to unscrew the valve insert from the valve and release the air. i Fully deflating the tyre may take a few minutes. X X Screw the valve insert back into the valve. Screw the valve cap back on. X Remove the protective film from the vehicle tool kit and put it over the collapsible emergency spare wheel. X Stow the collapsible emergency spare wheel in the emergency spare wheel well under the boot. X X Inflating the collapsible emergency spare wheel Stowage space (example: CLS Coupé) Open the stowage well (Y page 391). Reach into cutout : in the tool holder and lift it up. X Remove collapsible emergency spare wheel ;. ! Inflate the collapsible emergency spare wheel using the tyre inflation compressor before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be damaged. X X ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- pressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Fitting a wheel" section (Y page 374). Stowing a used collapsible emergency spare wheel ! Only place the collapsible emergency spare wheel in the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehicle. Take the following steps to stow a used collapsible emergency spare wheel. It will not otherwise fit into the spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this work performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Mount the collapsible emergency spare wheel as described (Y page 373). Emergency spare wheel Stow plug ? and the air hose in the lower section of the blower housing. X Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the vehicle. X Wheels and tyres The collapsible emergency spare wheel must be mounted before it is inflated. X Pull connector ? and the air hose out of the housing. X Remove the cap from the valve on the collapsible emergency spare wheel. X Screw union nut : on the air hose onto the valve. X Make sure on/off switch A of the tyre inflation compressor is set to 0. X Insert connector ? into the cigarette lighter socket or into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter (Y page 317). Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 317). X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 159). X Press on/off switch A on the tyre inflation compressor to I. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure is shown on pressure gauge =. X Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pressure. The specified tyre pressure is printed on the yellow label of the emergency spare wheel. X When the specified tyre pressure has been reached, press on/off switch A on the electric air pump to 0. The tyre inflation compressor is switched off. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X If the tyre pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release button ; until the correct tyre pressure has been reached. X Unscrew union nut : on the air hose from the valve. X Screw the valve cap onto the collapsible emergency spare wheel valve again. 393 Z Emergency spare wheel 394 Technical data All vehicles (except AMG vehicles) "Minispare" emergency spare wheel Tyres Light-alloy wheels T 155/70 R17 110 M8, 9 Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 4.0 B x 17 H2 ET 348, 9 T 155/60 R18 107 M Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) 4.5 B x 18 H2 ET 36 AMG vehicles Wheels and tyres Collapsible emergency spare wheel 8 9 Tyres Light-alloy wheels 175/50 - 19 97 P Tyre pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi) 6.5 B x 19 H2 ET 14 Not in conjunction with Sports package code 950. Not for CLS 500 and CLS 500 4MATIC. 395 Useful information ............................ 396 Information on technical data ......... 396 Vehicle electronics ........................... 396 Identification plates ......................... 398 Service products and capacities ..... 399 Vehicle data ...................................... 407 Technical data Trailer tow hitch ................................ 409 396 Vehicle electronics Useful information i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- els, series and optional equipment for your vehicle that were available at the time of going to press. National variations are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all of the functions described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 26). Information on technical data You can find current technical data on the Internet on our Mercedes‑Benz homepage. Technical data i The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics ! Only have work carried out on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors, actuating components and connector leads, at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) G WARNING If RF transmitters are tampered with or not properly retrofitted, the electromagnetic radiation they emit can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This may jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you use the RF transmitter in the vehicle in an improper way, its electromagnetic radiation can disrupt vehicle electronics, e.g. if: Rthe RF transmitter is not connected to an exterior aerial Rthe exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection aerial This can jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating in the vehicle, always connect the RF transmitter to the low-reflection exterior aerial. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. the maximum permissible output in these wavebands. Ronly approved aerial positions may be used. Robserve Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discus- Vehicle electronics CLS Coupé: approved aerial positions : Front roof area ; Rear roof area = Rear wing ? Boot lid CLS Shooting Brake: approved aerial positions : Rear roof area ; Rear wing i When fitting an aerial on the front roof area of vehicles with a sliding sunroof, observe the sweeping range of the roof. On the rear wing, it is recommended that you position the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the centre of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for fitting aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) transmitters. Comply with the legal requirements for add-on parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or aerial connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maximum transmission outputs or aerial positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values: Waveband Maximum transmission output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 100 W 4 m waveband 74 - 78 MHz 30 W 2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Trunked radio/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz 35 W GSM/DCS/PCS 850/900/1800/1900 10 W UMTS/LTE 10 W Technical data sion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Observe the notes on operating mobile phones (Y page 319). The following aerial positions may be used for the correct installation of RF transmitters: 397 The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW RMobile phones (GSM/DCS/PCS/UMTS/ LTE) Z Identification plates 398 There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: C Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) D Paint code RTrunked radio/Tetra cm waveband RGSM/DCS/PCS RUMTS/LTE R70 Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) Vehicle identification plate (example: CLS Shooting Brake) : Vehicle identification plate ; Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG) = EU type approval number (only for certain Technical data ? A B X Open the front right-hand door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. C D E countries) VIN Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg) Maximum permissible mass of vehicle/ trailer combination (kg) Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is sample data. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate. Vehicle identification plate (example: CLS Coupé) : Vehicle identification plate ; Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG) = EU type approval number (only for certain countries) ? VIN A Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg) B Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) Service products and capacities VIN 399 Service products include the following: Rfuels Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Rbrake fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid control system refrigerant When handling, storing and disposing of any service products, please observe the relevant regulations. Components and service products must be matched. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use products tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appropriate section. You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: Rclimate The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 398). Engine number The engine number is stamped into the crankcase. You can obtain further information from any qualified specialist workshop. Service products and capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Service product can be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Observe the instructions on the respective original container when using, storing and disposing off service products. Always store service products in the sealed original container. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner. RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Further information can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. RMB Fuel Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. Z Technical data Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering : upwards. VIN ; can be seen. X 400 Service products and capacities G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: Model Models with 59.0 l total capacity Approx. 8.0 l Models with 80.0 l total capacity Approx. 9.0 l AMG vehicles Approx. 14.0 l RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- oughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. Technical data Tank capacity The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. Model Total capacity CLS 500 CLS 500 4MATIC 80.0 l AMG vehicles 66.0 l or 80.0 l All other models 59.0 l or 80.0 l Of which reserve fuel Petrol (EN 228, E DIN 51626-1) Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Only refuel using premium-grade unlea- ded petrol with at least 95 ROZ/85 MOZ, that conforms to European standard EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 or an equivalent specification. Fuel of this specification can contain up to 10 % ethanol. Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 can lead to increased wear and damage the engine and exhaust system. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat- ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol) (100% ethanol) RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol) RM30 (petrol with 30% methanol) RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) RE100 Service products and capacities with additives containing metal Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. Do not use additives. This can otherwise lead to engine damage. This does not include cleaning additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with additives recommended by MercedesBenz; see "Additives". You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff. i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON/ 82 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower RON/MON. i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Information on refuelling (Y page 178). AMG vehicles ! Only refuel using super unleaded petrol with at least 98 RON/88 MON that conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. ! Premium-grade unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 95 RON/85 MON may be used as a temporary measure if the recommended fuel is not available. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. As much as possible, avoid driving at full throttle. ! Regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON may also be used as a temporary measure if the recommended fuel is not available. Doing so results in noticeably higher fuel consumption, and the engine power output is noticeably reduced. Avoid driving at full throttle. If only regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON or lower is available, you must have the vehicle adapted to this fuel at a qualified specialist workshop. i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. CLS 350 ! Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON/ 85 MON that conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the emission control system. i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free unleaded fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Additives ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must Z Technical data RPetrol RDiesel 401 402 Service products and capacities only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the instructions for use in the product description. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a MercedesBenz Service Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Always observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Diesel (EN 590) Fuel grade Technical data G WARNING If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, components in the exhaust system may overheat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to diesel fuel. ! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel that conforms to the European standard EN 590 or is of equivalent quality. Fuel that does not conform to EN 590 can lead to increased wear as well as damage to the engine and exhaust system. ! Do not use the following: Rmarine diesel Rheating oil Rbio-diesel Rvegetable oil Rpetrol Rparaffin Rkerosene Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do not use any special additives. This can otherwise lead to engine damage. ! Vehicles with diesel particle filters: in countries outside the EU, only use low sulphur Euro diesel with a sulphur content of under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission control system could be damaged. ! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil- ter: in countries where only diesel fuel with a high sulphur content is available, you will need to carry out your vehicle's oil change at shorter intervals. More information about the interval for oil change can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff. Information on refuelling (Y page 178). Low outside temperatures In winter months, diesel fuel with an improved cold flow quality is available. In Europe, the EN 590 standard defines various climatedependent temperature categories. Malfunctions can be avoided by refuelling with diesel fuel that corresponds to the climatic specifications outlined in EN 590. At unusually low outside temperatures, it is possible that the flow characteristics of the diesel fuel could be insufficient. Accordingly, diesel fuel from warmer areas may not be suitable for operation in colder climatic conditions. i Further information on country-specific fuel properties and fuel types with low-temperature resistance can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at filling stations. Fuel consumption information H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists believe to be principally responsible for Service products and capacities The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following situations: Rat very low outside temperatures Rin urban traffic Ron short journeys Rin mountainous terrain Rwhen towing a trailer i Only for certain countries: you can find the current consumption and emission values of your vehicle in the COC documents (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. The consumption figures were, in each case, based on the currently applicable version: Rfor vehicles that comply with standards up to and including the EURO 4 standard, in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC Rfor vehicles that comply with or exceed the EURO 5 standard, in accordance with Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007 Deviations from these values may occur under normal operating conditions. AdBlue® Important safety notes Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling AdBlue® (Y page 399). AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: Rnon-toxic Rcolourless and odourless Rnon-flammable If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may be released. Ammonia vapours have a pungent odour and are particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and throat. You may also experience coughing and watery eyes. Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only fill the AdBlue® tank in wellventilated areas. Low outside temperatures AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of approximately -11 †. The vehicle is delivered from the factory equipped with an AdBlue® preheating system. Winter operation can thus be guaranteed even at temperatures below -11 †. Additives ! Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241. Do not use additives with AdBlue® and do not dilute AdBlue® with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system. Purity ! Impurities in AdBlue® (e.g. due to other service products, cleaning agents or dust) lead to: Rincreased emission values to the catalytic converter Rengine damage Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC® exhaust gas aftertreatment system Rdamage Z Technical data global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences, road conditions or traffic flow You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. 403 404 Service products and capacities Assuring the purity of AdBlue® is particularly important with respect to avoiding malfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system. If AdBlue® is pumped out of the AdBlue® tank, e.g. during repair work, do not use this fluid to refill the tank. The purity of the fluid can no longer be guaranteed. Capacities Model All models Total capacity 25.5 l Engine oil Technical data General notes When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 399). The quality of the engine oil is decisive for the function and service life of an engine. After extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves engine oils that correspond to the current technical standard. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. Further information on tested and approved engine oils can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. MercedesBenz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz approval is indicated on the oil container by the inscription "MB Approval" and the corresponding designation, e.g. MB Approval 229.51. You can call up an overview of approved engine oils on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by entering the designation, e.g. 229.5. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Petrol engines: in certain countries, different engine oils can be used, provided that the maintenance intervals are reduced. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Petrol engines All models Diesel engines with a diesel particle filter All models MB Approval 229.5 MB Approval 228.51, 229.31, 229.51 Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for AMG vehicles. i If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add the following engine oils until the next oil change: Rvehicles with a petrol engine: MB Approval 229.1, 229.3 or ACEA A3 Rvehicles with a diesel engine: MB Approval 229.1, 229.3, 229.5 or ACEA C3 This must only be added once and the amount must not be greater than 1.0 l. Capacities The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter. Model Replacement amount CLS 350 CLS 250 CDI 6.5 l AMG vehicles 8.5 l All other models 8.0 l Additives ! Do not use any additives with the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Service products and capacities Engine oil viscosity 405 Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet. Brake fluid G WARNING The brake fluid continuously absorbs moisture from the air. This results in the boiling point of the brake fluid lowering. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form when the brakes are subjected to a heavy load. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescribed intervals. Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling brake fluid (Y page 399). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Service Booklet. Coolant Important safety notes G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you top up the antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet. Z Technical data Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity rating, it flows slowly; the lower the viscosity, the faster it flows. Engine oil selection is based on the respective outside temperatures and in accordance with the SAE classification (viscosity). The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature properties of engine oils can be significantly impaired during operation due to, for example, ageing or soot and fuel accretion. It is therefore strongly recommended to observe regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. 406 Service products and capacities Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (Y page 399). The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for the following: protection protection Rraising the boiling point If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant during operation will be approximately 130 †. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Make sure the windscreen washer concentrate does not come into contact with the filler neck. ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. Ranti-corrosion Rantifreeze Technical data Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -37 †. Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not be dissipated as effectively. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1 . i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. i The coolant is checked at every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. Windscreen washer system and headlamp cleaning system Important safety notes G WARNING If windscreen washer concentrate comes into contact with hot components of the engine or the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. ! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. ! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the spraying nozzles could become blocked. Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling washer fluid (Y page 399). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperature. X RDown to Ò10 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 2 parts water. RDown to Ò20 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 1 part water. RDown to Ò29 †: mix 2 parts MB WinterFit to 1 part water. i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Vehicle data Vehicle data Model General notes CLS 63 AMG 4MATIC CLS 63 AMG SMODEL 4MATIC 1792 mm All other models 1788 mm Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tyres - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload. Rvehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 398). Ronly for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle. Dimensions and weights (CLS Coupé) Opening height : Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. All models (except AMG vehicles) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2075 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1881 mm Wheelbase 2874 mm Maximum roof load 100 kg Maximum boot load 100 kg Model (except AMG vehicles) Vehicle length CLS 500 CLS 500 4MATIC 4956 mm All other models 4940 mm Model (except AMG vehicles) Model Opening height : CLS 500 CLS 500 4MATIC 1787 mm CLS 63 AMG CLS 63 AMG SMODEL 1772 mm Vehicle height CLS 500 CLS 500 4MATIC 1419 mm All other models 1416 mm All models (AMG vehicles) Vehicle length 4995 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2071 mm Z Technical data Please note that for the specified vehicle data: 407 408 Vehicle data All models (AMG vehicles) Model Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1881 mm Wheelbase 2874 mm Maximum roof load 100 kg Technical data Maximum boot load : Opening height CLS 63 AMG 4MATIC CLS 63 AMG SMODEL 4MATIC 1996 mm All other models 1971 mm Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Model (AMG vehicles) Vehicle height CLS 63 AMG CLS 63 AMG S-MODEL 1396 mm All models (except AMG vehicles) 2075 mm CLS 63 AMG 4MATIC CLS 63 AMG S-MODEL 4MATIC 1416 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1881 mm Wheelbase 2874 mm Dimensions and weights (CLS Shooting Brake) Maximum roof load Maximum boot load Model (except AMG vehicles) Model : Opening height CLS 500 CLS 500 4MATIC 1994 mm CLS 63 AMG CLS 63 AMG SMODEL 1976 mm 100 kg Vehicle length CLS 500 CLS 500 4MATIC 4960 mm All other models 4956 mm Model (except AMG vehicles) Vehicle height CLS 500 CLS 500 4MATIC 1433 mm All other models 1416 mm All models (AMG vehicles) Vehicle length 5000 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2071 mm Trailer tow hitch 409 All models (AMG vehicles) 1881 mm Wheelbase 2874 mm Maximum roof load 100 kg Model (AMG vehicles) Vehicle height CLS 63 AMG CLS 63 AMG S-MODEL 1413 mm CLS 63 AMG 4MATIC CLS 63 AMG S-MODEL 4MATIC 1436 mm Trailer tow hitch Mounting dimensions ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type. If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis. : Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch ; Overhang dimension = Rear axle centre line CLS Shooting Brake: for trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the overhang dimension including protective covering is 1278 mm. Trailer towing is not permissible on the following models: RCLS 63 AMG 63 AMG 4MATIC RCLS 63 AMG S-MODEL RCLS 63 AMG S-MODEL 4MATIC RCLS Z Technical data Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 410 Trailer tow hitch Trailer loads ! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight. Do not use a noseweight of less than 50kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose. Note that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual payload. Trailer towing is not permissible on the following models: RCLS 63 AMG RCLS 63 AMG 4MATIC RCLS 63 AMG S-MODEL RCLS 63 AMG S-MODEL 4MATIC CLS Shooting Brake (all models) Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill) 2100 kg Permissible trailer load, unbraked 750 kg Maximum drawbar noseweight (the drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load) 84 kg Technical data The actual noseweight may not, however, be higher than the value which is given: Ron the type plate of the trailer tow hitch and the type plate of the trailer The lowest weight applies. You can attach carrier systems, e.g. bicycle racks or load-bearing implements, to the ball coupling. The maximum noseweight of 75 kg applies when using carrier systems on the ball coupling. Ron Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer Trailer towing is not permissible on the following models: RCLS 63 AMG 63 AMG 4MATIC RCLS 63 AMG S-MODEL RCLS 63 AMG S-MODEL 4MATIC RCLS CLS Shooting Brake (all models) CLS 350 1400 kg CLS 500 1425 kg CLS 500 4MATIC 1415 kg CLS 250 CDI 1380 kg Trailer tow hitch 411 CLS 350 CDI 1405 kg CLS 350 CDI 4MATIC 1400 kg Technical data CLS Shooting Brake (all models) Z 412